JP6730962B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and then stopped and displayed , and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state in which a game value is given to a player is set. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be generated.

Conventionally, a winning opening called a starting winning opening is provided in the game area on the game board, a random number is acquired based on the winning of a hit ball at the starting winning opening, and the winning judgment is made, based on the winning result. 2. Description of the Related Art A gaming machine that provides a player with a predetermined profit (for example, a special gaming state) is widely used (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2007-89978, A

By the way, in the conventional game machine, the gambling property may be too high.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing gambling from becoming too high.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
A game in which a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and then stopped is executed, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state in which a game value is given to a player can be generated In the machine
Control means for controlling the game,
Probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the special result is assigned , setting means for enabling selection from a plurality of types of probability set value by the operation of the operating means ,
The control means is
It is possible to select the length of the stop display period in which the result of the game is stopped and displayed according to the probability setting value,
Person when the first probability set value corresponding to the first probability value as the probability setting value is selected, a second probability setting value is selected that corresponds to less than the first probability value second probability value It is characterized in that the probability of selecting the longer stop display period is higher than that in the case of the presence.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a 1st special variation winning device. It is an expanded explanatory view showing the details of a collective display. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in the special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in the special game state. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a figure explaining a model designation command. It is a flow chart explaining checksum calculation processing. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number updating process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flow chart explaining switch reading processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. 6 is a flowchart illustrating random number update processing 1. 9 is a flowchart illustrating random number update processing 2. It is a flow chart explaining winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining fraud & prize monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining the winning number counter update processing. It is the flowchart which explains the game machine state check processing. It is a flow chart explaining pay-out busy signal check processing. It is a flow chart explaining V abnormal passage monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a remaining ball monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining discharge ball monitoring processing. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure game process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flow chart explaining a special process starting port switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart explaining pre-reading big hit judging processing. It is a flow chart explaining the upper special winning opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a lower special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining probability change operation field switch monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining remaining ball processing timer update processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flow chart explaining fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining 2-byte distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure fluctuation process. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart explaining time shortening change frequency update processing. It is a flow chart explaining a special figure game information check processing. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare/interval interval process shift setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare/during-interval processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing 1 during a special winning opening opening. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening opening process shift setting process 2. It is a flow chart explaining processing during opening of the special winning opening. It is a flow chart explaining big hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit ending process. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flow chart explaining lever solenoid control processing. It is the flowchart which explains production command setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol variation control process. It is a flow chart for explaining a general-purpose game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining ordinary processing usually. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during normal figure change. It is a flow chart explaining processing during general figure change. It is a flow chart explaining processing during public figure display. It is a flow chart explaining the processing during ordinary drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a normal power operation shift setting process. It is a figure explaining the operation mode of a normal variation winning a prize device. It is a flowchart explaining a normal electric ball remaining process. It is a flow chart explaining end processing per ordinary figure. It is a flow chart explaining segment LED edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining abnormal discharge monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining magnet irregularity monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining board radio wave irregularity monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening signal editing process. It is the figure which shows one example of the condominium information production. It is the figure which shows one example of the condominium information production. It is the flowchart which explains the main processing in the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart explaining reception command check processing. It is a flow chart explaining received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart explaining big hit type command processing. It is a flow chart explaining the condominium notice effect setting process and the condominium notice effect cancellation process. It is a figure showing an example of suggestive production. It is a figure explaining the modification of V winning notification production. It is a figure explaining a high probability state. It is a figure explaining the modifications 1-3. It is a flow chart explaining the big hit end processing in modification 1-1. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process in the modification 1-1. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation group table in the case of being a big hit which can be selected in a high probability state among the fluctuation group tables in the modification 1-1. It is a flow chart explaining the big hit end processing in modification 1-2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process in the modification 1-2. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation group table in the case where it is selectable in a high probability state and the result is a big hit among the variation group tables in the modification 1-2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process in the modification 2-1. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a variation group table in the variation group table in Modification 2-1 in a case where the variation group table can be selected in a high probability state and the result is out of alignment. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process in the modification 2-2. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a variation group table in the variation group table in Modification 2-2, which is selectable in a high probability state and the result is out of alignment. It is a figure explaining the modification 4. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process in the modification 4-1. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening opening process in the modification 4-1. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening remaining sphere processing in modification 4-1. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process in the modification 4-2. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening opening process in the modification 4-2. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening residual ball processing in the modification 4-2. It is a figure explaining each set time in the modification 5-1. It is a figure explaining each set time in the modification 5-2. It is a figure explaining each set time in the modification 5-3. It is a figure explaining each set time in the modification 5-3.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable/closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, a lamp, an LED, etc. are built in, and decorations and effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification color of the lamp, the LED, etc. (for example, red). The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) and the speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12 as well. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b inform the user of the abnormality by voice. It should be noted that a lamp for notifying the dispensing abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

The frame decoration device 18 on the right side when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 10 is one of the auxiliary effect devices that can execute the auxiliary effect that is an effect corresponding to the game effect that is an effect according to the progress of the game. Is provided with a protrusion 80. The projecting portion 80 is provided so as to project to the right side surface of the front frame 12, is visible to the player who is playing the game on the gaming machine, and is playing the game on the gaming machine. It is also visible to people other than the person. The protrusion 80 has a plurality of light emitting regions 81 arranged in the vertical direction. Each light emitting area 81 can independently control the light emitting mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, emission color, etc.), and the auxiliary effect is executed by the light emitting mode of the plurality of light emitting areas 81.

For the game effect that is an effect according to the progress of the game, for example, an error notification for notifying that an error has occurred in the game machine, a game effect for the special figure variation display game being executed, and a preliminary determination for starting memory There are a look-ahead effect that suggests or informs the result, an effect button operation effect that instructs the operation of the operating means, and a firing direction instruction notification that indicates the firing direction of the game ball in the game area. In the projecting portion 80, the light emitting mode of the plurality of light emitting areas 81 is changed in accordance with the game effect selected from these game effects according to the current game state, and the auxiliary effect is executed.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (reservoir plate) for supplying game balls to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An upper plate ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower plate (receiving plate) 23 that stores the game balls that have been paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, and an operating unit 24 of the ball striking device are provided.
Further, on the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21, an effect button 25 having an effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, the effect button 25 has a built-in LED so that the light emission mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, emission color, etc.) of the upper surface can be changed. , Auxiliary production can be executed. That is, the effect button 25 also constitutes one of the auxiliary effect devices capable of executing the auxiliary effect corresponding to the game effect.

Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, to the right of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A button 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided.
In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 to cause the ball launching device to direct the game balls supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. Further, the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to produce an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is configured by being surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game production structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged in the substantial center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent the game ball from jumping in from the peripheral game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) has a configuration in which three 7-segment displays (variable display areas) in which seven light-emitting bodies (segments) are arranged in a figure 8 are arranged. Each light emitter can change the light emission mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, color of light emission, etc.) independently, and by controlling the light emission mode, identification information (special pattern) can be displayed for each 7-segment display. is there. It is also possible to display information by combining a plurality of 7-segment display devices. The display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variable display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols) are variably displayed corresponding to the special figure variable display game and then stopped and displayed. In addition, effects related to the special figure variation display game can be executed by changing the light emission mode.

In addition, above the display device 41 in the center case 40, a board effect device 44 for effecting a game by operating is provided. The board effect device 44 is a drum type device that can rotate about an axis extending in the left-right direction, and is configured such that only a part of the peripheral surface facing the front is visible to the player. .. Information is displayed on the circumferential surface for each area that is visible when facing the front, and multiple types of information are displayed along the circumferential direction.Information displayed on the circumferential surface facing the front. According to, the effect of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, below the display device 41 in the center case 40, a decorative special figure starting memory display section 42 for performing a decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory is provided.

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a starting condition of the first special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 5).
Further, below the start winning port 36, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize is provided.

To the right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol starting gate (general drawing starting gate) 34 that gives a starting condition of the general figure fluctuation display game. The game ball that has passed through the normal starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5).

Further, on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and below the universal figure starting gate 34, an ordinary variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, which gives a starting condition of the second special figure variation display game, A start winning area) is provided.
The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b that can be opened by turning the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. The movable member 37b is normally provided. It holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) which is vertically closed so that the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the universal figure fluctuation display game is a predetermined stop display mode, the ordinary electric prize 37 is operated by the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 5) as a drive device so that the upper end side is tilted toward the front side. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball easily flows. The game ball that has won the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 5). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be allowed to win even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state.

Further, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 35 is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal variable winning device 37. Are arranged. The game balls that have won the general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 5).

Further, on the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a first special variation winning device (lower major winning opening) capable of converting a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 38 and a second special variation winning device (upper special winning opening) 39 are arranged.

The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening/closing door 38c that can be opened by pivoting in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the lower special winning opening is converted from a closed state (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variation winning device 38 includes, for example, a lower special winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening/closing door 38c driven by a lower special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 5) as a driving device, and is in a special game state. Is designed to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the lower special prize opening by converting the lower special prize opening from the closed state to give a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player. ing. Inside the lower special winning opening (winning area), a lower special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 5) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the lower special winning opening. There is.

The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening/closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in the direction of falling toward the front side, and is a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the upper special winning opening is converted from a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous for the player). That is, the second special variation winning device 39 is provided with a special winning opening that is opened/closed by an opening/closing door 39c driven by an upper winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 5) as a drive device, for example, during the special gaming state. Is designed to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the upper special winning opening by converting the upper special winning opening from the closed state to give the player a predetermined game value (prize). ing. Inside the upper special winning opening (winning area), a upper special winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 5) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting the game ball entering the upper special winning opening. There is.

FIG. 3 shows the flow paths of the game balls in the first special variation winning device 38. Inside the first special variation winning device 38 (winning area), a lower special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first special variation winning device 38. ing. All the game balls that have entered the first special variation winning device 38 are detected through the lower special winning opening switch 38a and flow into the upper flow path 38j.

The upper flow path 38j is provided with a probability variation operating area 38h into which the game ball can flow, and by a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 5) so as to change the probability of the game ball flowing into the probability variation operation area 38h. A lever member 38i that operates is provided. The lever member 38i is a plate-shaped member that is slidable in the front-rear direction and projects forward as shown in FIG. 3 to cover the probability variation operating region 38h, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot flow into the probability variation operating region 38h, and a rear position. It is possible to convert the game ball into an open state in which the game ball can flow into the probability variation operating region 38h.

The probability variation operating region 38h is provided with a probability variation operating region switch 38d capable of detecting the inflow of a game ball, and the game ball flowing into the probability variation operating region 38h is detected by the probability variation operating region switch 38d and then the lower flow path 38k. Flow into. The probability state of the special figure variation display game is set to the high probability state based on the detection of the game ball by the probability variation operation area switch 38d after the special game state ends.

In addition, a passage opening switch 38g capable of detecting passage of the game ball is provided on the downstream side of the probability variation operating region 38h in the upper flow path 38j, and the game ball that has not flowed into the probability variation operating region 38h is provided. After being detected by the passage opening switch 38g, it flows into the lower flow path 38k. The lower flow path 38k is designed so that the flow path through which the game balls that have passed through the probability variation operation area 38h flow down and the flow path through which the game balls that have passed through the passage opening switch 38g flow down merge on the downstream side. A discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting passage of game balls is provided at the downstream end of the lower flow passage 38k, and all the game balls flowing into the lower flow passage 38k are detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e. After that, it flows into the discharge flow path for discharging the game balls to the outside of the game machine.

In the first special variation winning device 38 thus configured, the number of game balls detected by the lower special winning opening switch 38a and the number of game balls detected by the probability variation operation area switch 38d and the passage opening switch 38g match. By doing so, it can be confirmed that all the game balls that have flowed into the upper flow path 38j have been discharged. Furthermore, since the number of game balls detected by the probability variation operation area switch 38d and the passage opening switch 38g and the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e match, all the game balls that have flowed into the lower flow path 38k. You can confirm that it has been discharged. Further, the number of game balls flowing in detected by the lower special winning opening switch 38a and the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e match, so that the game balls flowing into the first special variation winning device 38 are It can be confirmed that all have been discharged.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game area 32 in which the game balls flow down, the area on the left side of the center case 40 is the left side game area and the area on the right side of the center case 40 is the right side game area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots a game ball to the left side game area (so-called left hitting), so that the player can aim for a winning at the starting winning opening 36 or the left general winning opening 35, and the right playing area. By launching a game ball (so-called right hit) to the universal figure starting gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, the first special variation winning device 38, the second special variation winning device 39, and the right general winning opening 35 Can be aimed at.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure changing display game, the second special figure changing display game, and the general figure starting gate 34, which are special figure changing display games, are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a universal figure variable display game triggered by winning and various information.

As shown in FIG. 4, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display device (first special figure fluctuation display section) for a first special figure fluctuation display game including a 7-segment type display device (LED lamp) or the like. ) 51 (D1) and special figure 2 display device for second special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display section) 52 (D2), and start of first special figure variation display game composed of LED lamps A special figure 1 hold indicator 54 (D11, D12) for informing the memory number and a special figure 2 hold indicator 55 (D13, D14) for informing the starting memory number of the second special figure variable display game are provided.

In addition, the collective display device 50, a round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) that displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are opened/closed), a time saving state ( The first game state display unit 76 (D9) that informs whether the player is in the normal game support state or in the specific game state), which is advantageous to the player between left hitting (normal hitting) and right hitting (corresponding to the playing condition) A second game state display unit 77 (D8) is provided to notify the user how to hit. In addition, a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state display unit, probability state display unit) 78 (D17) for displaying that the probability state of big hit is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is provided. Has been.
Further, the collective display device 50 includes a public figure display device 74 (D10, D18) for the public figure variable display game and a public figure hold display device 75 (D15, D16) for notifying the number of starting memories of the general figure variable display game. ), and are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 is displayed, for example, while the variation display game is being executed, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed on the display device 41. The segment is driven to blink to show that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 msec, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the first special figure variable display game in the special figure 1 display device 51, as shown in FIG. 4B, in addition to the central segment, it is provided on the lower right side of 7 segments. The selected eighth segment is also driven to blink so as to indicate that it is changing, and it is possible to distinguish the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Moreover, you may display that it is fluctuating by sequentially displaying a plurality of identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the special figure variation display game. When the result of the game is “out”, for example, the central segment (8th segment on the lower right side in addition to the special figure 1) is turned on as a result mode of the out, and the result of the game is In the case of “win”, the game result is displayed by turning on a result mode (for example, numbers or symbols) other than the off result mode (special result mode).

The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 displays the number of undigested balls (first start memory number=reserved number) among the number of prize winning balls into the starting winning opening 36, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 indicator 51. As shown in FIG. 4(c), the display is performed by turning off and lighting (blinking) a plurality of LEDs.
The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 displays the number of undigested balls (second starting memory number=hold number) among the number of prize winning balls to the normal variation winning device 37, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52. As shown in FIG. 4C, the display is performed by turning off and lighting (blinking) a plurality of LEDs.
The round display unit 60 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and turns off all the LEDs when not in the special game state, and is selected according to the result during the special game state as shown in FIG. 4D. The LEDs are turned on according to the number of rounds. The round display section may be configured by a 7-segment type display.

As shown in FIG. 4E, the first gaming state display unit 76 turns on the LED when it is in the time saving state, and turns off the LED when it is not in the time saving state.
As shown in FIG. 4(e), the second game state display unit 77 turns off the LED when the left hitting is more advantageous to the player than the right hitting (normal hitting), When the right hitting is more advantageous to the player than the left hitting (in the right hitting), the LED is turned on.
As shown in FIG. 4(e), the third gaming state display unit 78 turns on the LED when the power is on and is in the high probability state, and turns off the LED when not in the high probability state.

The general figure fluctuation display game on the general figure display device 74 is such that during the variable display of the general figure fluctuation display game, the variable symbol number shown in FIG. Display that it is fluctuating. If the result is a hit, it indicates that it is a hit by lighting in a lighting manner according to the hit type, and if the result is a hit, the two LEDs are turned off to indicate that it is a hit. ..
The universal figure hold indicator 75 displays the number of undigested balls (number of universal figure start memory=reserved number) among the number of spheres passing through the universal figure start gate 34, which is the variation start condition of the universal figure display 74, as shown in FIG. As shown in f), it is displayed by turning off and lighting (blinking) a plurality of LEDs.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in an integrated manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It comprises a CPU section 110 which has, an input section 120 which has an input port, an output section 130 which has an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 which connects the CPU section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130, and the like. ..

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and supplies an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock of a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generation. A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to be operable. To be done.

The power supply device 400 has a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V, and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V and DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that informs the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) constitutes a backup storage means capable of holding the stored data even when the power is cut off (the state where the power supply to the game machine is stopped). Then, when the power is restored, the control can be restarted based on the data held by the backup storage means.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and on the basis of this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.
The RAM initialization switch 112 may be operated to cancel the error even when the power is not turned on. In this case, only the error is cleared, and the processing such as initialization of the RAM 111C is not performed. ..

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random number values at the time of game control. Used as. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half variation group table, second half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before reaching the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included. Further, a variation pattern table for determining the variation time of the universal figure variation display game is also stored.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the special result mode, in the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (special gaming state), some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed, and already derived. The display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, the state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derived display, and is determined before the displayed result is derived and displayed. A display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variable display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the variable display area on the left and right, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, at the time when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same The state that has become the identification information, but excluding the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this reach state.

Then, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving the special result mode is different (expected value is different), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when the special result mode is lost). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared to the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the symbol of the big hit, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various types). A random number generation circuit for generating a random number of a variation pattern for determining the reach or the execution time of the variation display game in the variation display without reach, a hit random number for determining the hit of the universal figure variation display game, etc. And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A causes the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of variation pattern tables based on the operation state (time saving operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the state, the number of starting memories, and the like. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of a payout unit to drive a payout ball according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control for paying out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on a ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

Various switches and sensors are connected to the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111. Interface chips (proximity I/F) 121a and 121b for inputting a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converting it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Is provided. The input range of the proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b is 7V-11V, so that the lead wires of the sensor or the proximity switch are illegally short-circuited, the sensor or switch is removed from the connector, or the lead wires are cut. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as a floating state and output an abnormality detection signal.

The proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b are provided with a gate switch 34a in the universal start gate 34, a winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, a lower special winning opening switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, and a second special Large winning opening switch 39a in the variable winning device 39, a probability variation operating region switch 38d provided in the probability variation operating region 38h in the first special variation winning device 38, a start port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a normal variation prize A starting opening 2 switch 37a in the device 37, a passage opening switch 38g for detecting a game ball that has not flowed into the probability variation operation area 38h in the first special variation winning device 38, and a game discharged from the first special variation winning device 38 A discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting a ball and a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting emission of a radio wave to a game machine are connected.

The outputs of the proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b are supplied to the second input port 123 and the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower winning opening switch 38a, the upper winning opening switch 39a, the probability variation operation area switch 38d, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening. The detection signal of the 2 switch 37a is input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b, detection signals of the passage opening switch 38g, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, the board radio wave sensor 62 and abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected. Is input to the third input port 124.
Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided in the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a frame radio wave fraud signal from the payout control device 200 (provided in the front frame 12) A signal output based on detection of a radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor) and a payout busy signal (a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command) are also input. .. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal of the vibration sensor switch may be input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/Fs 121 a and 121 b, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the passage port switch 38 g of the output to the third input port 124 are from the main board 100 to the relay board 70. It is also designed to be supplied to a test-firing test device (not shown) via the. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 as well as the second input port 123. ..

As described above, the proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b are supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. It is like this.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 and asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level). be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality) from the payout control device 200, a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (lower) A signal output when detecting that the game balls are stored in the plate 23 in a predetermined amount or more (full), and a touch switch signal (a signal based on the input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) 1) is provided and is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In the first input port 122, a detection signal of a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided in the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, a main frame opening detection provided in the front frame (main frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like The detection signal of the switch 64 is also input.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is handled as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70.
The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123 and 124 of the input section 120. The data set in the ports of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is made so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for informing the test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) of the special symbol information of the variable display game and a signal indicating the probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a game shop. It should be noted that the detection signals of the switches that do not need to be processed, such as the start port switches, output from the proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b are supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. As an error signal indicating that the test is not possible, the error signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-inspection test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-shooting test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and has a lower special winning opening solenoid 38b for opening the first special variation winning device 38, an upper special winning opening solenoid 39b for opening the second special variation winning device 39, and a normal one. A second output port 134 for outputting operation data of a universal solenoid 37c for opening the variable winning device 37 and a lever solenoid 38f for operating a lever member 38i in the first special variable winning device 38 is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting ON/OFF data of a digit line (common line) to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, for example. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output section 130 receives operation data signals of the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b, the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b, the universal electric solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f output from the second output port 134, and outputs a solenoid drive signal. A first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal of a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and a fourth output A third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 that is output from the port 136, and an external information signal that is supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137. A fourth driver 138d for outputting to the external information terminal board 71 is provided.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential draws the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123 and 124 are not provided.

It should be noted that, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower large winning opening switch 38a, the upper large The winning opening switch 39a, the probability variation operating area switch 38d, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, and the passage opening switch 38g in the first special variation winning device 38 are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The production control device 300 controls the display of the display device 41 according to the command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 including an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. A device control circuit 312 and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b are provided.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and a storage content even if power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that is a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the effect contents and instructs the display device control circuit 312 to display the contents, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, and lights the decorative lamp. , Control of drive of motors and solenoids, management of effect time, etc. are executed. The display device control circuit 312 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are changed to the effect control command signal (effect command). ) As. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 has a signal level conversion function. There is.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, the board decoration LED control circuit 332, the front frame 12 and the like, which drive-controls the board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. A frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device) is provided on the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device is provided. You may have it.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided on the effect button 25, the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. That detects the ON/OFF state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 is provided to detect the signal and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a direct-current voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled by the same, and thus drives a motor and a solenoid. 32V DC, 12V DC for driving the display device 41, the motor and the LED, and 5V DC serving as the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331, and a voltage of 15V DC for driving the motor, the LED and the speaker. Has been done. Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in the performance control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. Further, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, the tone generator LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, the display device control circuit 312, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET that drive and control the lamp and the motor). Signal) to put them in a reset state. Further, the production control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools each part of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the production control device 300 is powered on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) toward a game area 32 from a launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , A winning opening 36, a normal variation winning device 37, a first special variation winning device 38 or a second special variation winning device 39, or flows into the outlet 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 to enter the game area It is discharged from 32. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the first special variation winning device 38, or the second special variation winning device 39, the number corresponding to the type of winning opening Prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 5) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided, and the game area 32 is provided. When the game ball driven in passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the normal figure starting memory number is the upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces) based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure starting gate 34. If less than), the number of ordinary figure starting memory is added (+1) and one ordinary figure starting memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of stored universal figure starting prizes is displayed on the universal figure hold indicator 75 of the collective display device 50. Further, in the universal figure starting memory, a random number value for hit determination (per random number value) for determining the result of the universal figure variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a figure start memory and the figure variation display game can be started, that is, when the figure variation display game is not being executed, the figure variation display game hits and the normal variation winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If the hit state is not a hit state, the hit determination random number value stored in the most commonly stored figure start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit/miss of the figure change display game. Then, the process of starting the universal figure variation display game is performed. When this random number for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the general figure variable display game becomes a win and a specific result mode (normal figure specification result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 predetermines a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns for a predetermined variation time on the public figure display device 74 provided in the collective display device 50 as a process of executing the general figure variable display game. After performing the universal figure changing display which is repeatedly displayed in the order, the process of displaying the universal figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. It should be noted that the universal figure display device 74 is configured by the display device 41, and, for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are normally used as the identification information, which is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped and displayed to display the result. It may be configured.

When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern that is either the first hit stop symbol or the second hit stop symbol that is a special result mode is displayed on the universal figure display 74 in accordance with the type of hit. At the same time as the stop display, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to perform control to open the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined time. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the general-picture variation display game is off, control is performed to display a lighting pattern on the public-picture display 74 as a result mode of the off-going.

The winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first starting memory which is the starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 is limited to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4). In addition to being stored, the second starting memory, which is the starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37, is stored within a predetermined upper limit (for example, four). Based on the winning to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first starting memory or the second starting memory. Then, the number of stored starting memories is displayed on the special figure 1 reserved display 54 and the special figure 2 reserved display 55 of the collective display device 50, and is also displayed as a decorative special figure starting memory display at a predetermined position of the center case 40. To be done.

When the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game is ready to start, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The generated big hit determination random number value is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the processing of determining the hitting loss of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

When executing the first special figure variation display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display device 51 (variation display device) over a predetermined variation time. After performing the special figure 1 changing display, a process of displaying the first special figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result form) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. In the case of executing the second special figure variable display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display 52 (variable display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 2 changing display, a process of displaying the second special figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result form) corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, etc.) corresponding to the special figure variable display game on the display device 41 (variable display device). The process of displaying the decorative special figure variable display game in which is variably displayed is performed. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the process of setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

In the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is displayed in the left variable display area (first special symbol) and the right variable display area ( (2nd special symbol), in each of the medium fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, after a predetermined time, the symbols that are changing are stopped sequentially in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as a change in display color and a variation mode are performed in order to improve interest.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, displays a lighting pattern that is a special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, and also Perform processing to generate a gaming state. Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also the special result mode.

In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening/closing door 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 by the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b, so that the game ball flows into the lower special winning opening. And the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b are used to open the opening/closing door 39c of the second special variation winning device 39 to allow the game balls to flow into the upper special winning opening. Then, until a condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls is won in the special winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. It is assumed that one round is opened, and control (cycle game) is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

Also, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h of the first special variation winning device 38 in the specific round. ing. In this high-probability state, the probability of having a special result in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal-probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation Both floating display games are in a high probability state.

Further, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a time saving state (specific game state, general figure high probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the universal figure fluctuation display game (general figure probability) is a high probability (general figure high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the open time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case of the normal variation winning device 37 being in the low probability state in normal figure.

For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (general figure fluctuation time) of the general figure fluctuation display game described above to be the second fluctuation display time shorter than the first fluctuation display time. Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the general figure stop time for displaying the result of the general figure fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time. Also, in the time saving state, when the universal figure variation display game is a winning result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) is longer than the first opening time in the normal state. It is possible to control so that the opening time is two. Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the ordinary variable winning device 37 (the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric power) is larger than the number of times of the second opening in which the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 is larger than the number of times of the second opening, with respect to one hit result of the game of displaying variation in the universal figure. Can be set to. Further, in the time saving state, the probability that the hit result of the universal figure fluctuation display game (the universal figure probability) is higher than the low probability (for example, 0/251) in the normal operation state, that is, the high probability (for example) 250/251. It is possible to

In the time saving state, the general variation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the universal figure fluctuation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication opening, the universal communication opening time, and the universal communication probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. Further, it is possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. In this embodiment, the movable member 37b is set not to open in the normal operation state (universal figure probability is 0). In addition, either one of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected when a hit occurs. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the short-time state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur.

The special display 1 display 51 and the special display 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special display variation display is performed independently or not simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use different display devices or different display areas for the first special figure variable display game and the second special figure variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. Further, the special machine 1 display 51 and the special machine 2 display 52 may not be provided in the gaming machine 10, and the special figure variable display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are executed in the order in which the starting memory occurs. Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as special figure variation display games.

7 and 8 show the operations of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 in the special gaming state. There are five types of special results, 12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, 5R normal, 4R probability variation, and 4R normal, and they are selected based on the jackpot symbol random number. The number of each jackpot type indicates the number of rounds, and the probability variation indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into the probability variation operation area 38h and is likely to be in a high probability state (probability variation state) after the end of the special game state. Indicates that it is unlikely that a game ball will flow into the probability variation operating region 38h, and it is unlikely that the high probability state (probability variation state) will occur after the special game state ends. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, whether or not a high probability state is established depending on whether or not a game ball flows into the probability variation operating area 38h. Therefore, even if the jackpot type is probability variation, the probability variation operating area 38h. If the game ball does not flow into the high probability state, even if the big hit type is normal, if the game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h, the high probability state occurs.

FIG. 7 shows an opening mode in each round in each jackpot type. Details of the opening mode are shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the 12R probability variation, the lower V opening for opening the first special variation winning device 38 is performed in the first round. The lower V opening is an opening mode in which it is highly possible that the game ball will flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. After the second round, the upper long opening for opening the second special variable winning device 39 and the lower long opening for opening the first special variable winning device 38 are alternately performed. Similarly, in the 5R probability variation and the 4R probability variation, in which the jackpot type is the probability variation, the lower V opening for opening the first special variation winning device 38 is similarly performed in the first round. In addition, in the 5R normal and the 4R normal in which the types of jackpots are normal, the lower short opening for opening the first special variation winning device 38 is performed in the first round. The lower short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility that a game ball will flow into the probability variation operating region 38h is lower than that of the lower V opening.

In any jackpot type, the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are configured to be opened alternately, so that a predetermined openable time has elapsed or a predetermined number of game balls are won. After the round ends, the other special variation winning device is opened when a predetermined interval time elapses. It should be noted that the game balls are allowed to flow into the probability variation operating region 38h only in the lower V opening and the lower short opening performed in the first round. Since the upper long opening and the upper short opening open the second special variation winning device 39, there is no possibility that the game ball will flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. Moreover, since the lever member 38i is not operated in the lower long opening or the lower short opening which is not the first round, there is no possibility that the game ball will flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is a round in which the game ball may flow into the probability variation operating region 38h forming the specific region, is the first round. Of course, this specific round may be a round other than the first round.

As shown in FIG. 8A, in the upper long opening, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened with the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) is reached. When any of the conditions for winning the game ball is established, the second special variation winning device 39 is closed and the round is finished (t12). After that, the interval time and the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing time are started (t12), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t13). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the special game state, the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are configured to be opened alternately, so that the first special variation winning combination with the elapse of the interval time. Although the device 38 is opened, the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing time continues in the second special variation winning device 39. The lower short opening shown in FIG. 8B is the same as the upper long opening except that the openable time and the interval time are different.

As shown in FIG. 8C, in the lower V opening, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened with the start of the round (t31). Further, with the start of the round, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on, and the probability variation operating area switch 38d is enabled. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member 38i covers the probability variation operating region 38h and the game ball cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member 38i retreats from the probability variation operating region 38h. The game ball is ready for inflow. The state in which the probability variation operating area switch 38d is valid is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the probability variation operating area switch 38d is treated as valid. On the other hand, the state in which the probability variation operating area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the probability variation operating area switch 38d detects a game ball, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off when 64 ms has elapsed from the start of the round (t32). Then, 100 ms after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability variation operating region switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, there is a possibility that the game ball won immediately after the first special variation winning device 38 is opened will flow into the probability variation operating region 38h.

When 200 ms has elapsed from the start of the round, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed (t34). Then, after the elapse of 2700 ms, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened again (t35), and either the condition that either the openable time of 25000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (eg, 9) of game balls wins is established. Then, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t39). After that, the interval time and the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing time are started (t39), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t41).

After the second opening of the first special variation winning device 38 (t35), the lever solenoid 38f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Further, the probability variation operating area switch 38d is also effective (t36). The second opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is opened for a sufficiently long time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f also continues for a long time, so that the game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h almost reliably. It will be. Therefore, if the type of jackpot is probable, it will almost certainly be a high-probability state.

Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be kept in the ON state for a predetermined time even after the first special variation winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variation winning device 38 just before closing. The gaming balls that have been played can also flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. It should be noted that the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to elapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is a lower big winning opening remaining ball process. If all of them are discharged within the time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off with the end of the remaining ball processing time (t42), the operation is ended, and the probability variation operation area switch 38d is invalidated.

In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed due to elapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls winning, and all the game balls winning the first special variation winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time. If the discharge is not completed, and if the discharge is completed by the end (t43) of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the lever solenoid 38f will be in the OFF state when the discharge is completed, and the operation will be terminated. , The probability variation operating area switch 38d becomes invalid.

In addition, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed due to the elapse of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls winning, and the game ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 is the lower big winning opening remaining ball processing time. If not all are discharged by the end (t43) of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state, the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43). Then, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off to end the operation. In this case, the probability variation operating region switch 38d becomes invalid (t44) 100 ms after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43).

As shown in FIG. 8D, in the lower short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variation winning device 38 in the lower V opening is performed (t51 to t54), and based on the completion of the opening. The round is finished (t54). The opening of the first special variation winning device 38 is for a very short period of time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short period of time. Therefore, it is unlikely that the game ball will flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. Therefore, a high probability state is rare when the type of jackpot is normal.

The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the valid/invalid switching of the probability variation operation area switch 38d are the same as those in the case of the lower V opening as long as the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 ( t56 to t63). Therefore, when the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 even after the lower winning hole remaining ball processing time has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state when the discharging of the remaining ball is completed. Then, the operation ends, and the probability variation operating area switch 38d becomes invalid. Further, if all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned OFF at the end of the period when the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62). After 100 ms have elapsed since the lever solenoid 38f was turned off (t62), the probability variation operating region switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

However, the lever solenoid 38f and the probability variation operation area switch 38d are controlled as shown in FIG. 8D in the lower short opening only when the lower short opening is performed in the first round. If the lower short-circuit is opened in the other rounds, the lever solenoid 38f is not operated, and the probability variation operation area switch 38d remains ineffective. In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 8(e), in the downward long opening, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened at the start of the round (t61), and the openable time of 25000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) is reached. When any of the conditions for winning the game ball is established, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed and the round is finished (t62). After that, the interval time and the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing time are started (t62), and when the interval time ends, the next round is started (t63). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set with the end of the round, and then the ending time is set. With this lower long open, the lever solenoid 38f remains in the OFF state, and the probability variation operating region switch 38d remains ineffective.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 14 performed at a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, first, the process of inhibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register etc. when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed.
Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order, and the leading 00h is set in step S4.
Next, a signal to stop firing is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the firing, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and the process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register or the like which is not a validity determination target) that is not a target of the RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the waiting time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the waiting time, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on until the waiting time elapses. Need to continue. However, by reading the state before the start of the waiting time, it will be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power Can be prevented from being accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). When the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). In addition, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0. Is determined (step S12).
When the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8).
If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access is permitted to the read/write RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step S13). ), OFF data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port that is pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15), and read in advance. Then, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

When the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S17), and the normal operation is performed. If so (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), checksum calculation processing for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the checksums of the two match (step S20).
If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG. 10 and the process for normal recovery from a power failure is performed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a legitimacy determination unit that determines the legitimacy of the predetermined data stored in the storage unit (RAM 111C) when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y) or when the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N), When it is determined that the checksum is not normal (does not match) (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 of FIG. 10 and initialization processing is performed. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. To make.

In step S21 of FIG. 10, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal is not fixed. Indefinite. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not fixed.
Then, the area in the RWM for storing the game state is examined to determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state (step S22). If the probability of the special figure is not high (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. When the probability of the special figure is high (step S22; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator, provided on the game board 30 The ON (lighting) data of the third gaming state display portion 78) is saved in the segment area (step S24).
Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S25), and step S31. Go to. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, the model designation command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the special figure 2 hold number command, the probability information command, the screen designation command (if the customer is waiting, the customer wait demo screen command, other If so, send multiple commands (such as the command on the recovery screen). That is, when the validity is confirmed by the validity judging means, the game is restarted based on the data stored in the storage means.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S26), and all of the busy signal status area and touch switch signal state monitoring area are included. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28).
Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is the customer waiting demonstration area and the area related to the setting of the effect mode.
Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and a predetermined time (for example, (For 30 seconds) a plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization by light and sound) are transmitted.

In step S31, processing for activating a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposed pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. The bit transposition pattern is the method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before the bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, the user may arbitrarily set it.

After that, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining the winning symbol of the special drawing). (Big hit symbol random number), Random number to determine the hit of the universal figure (random number per hit), Random number to determine the hit symbol of the universal figure (random number per symbol)) as the initial value (start value) saved in a predetermined area of RWM From (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are timer interrupts that are processing units of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) having the same cycle as the process. In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, the so-called "initial value changing method" is adopted in which the start value is changed each time the random number makes a round by using each initial value random number (generated by software). There is. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method by +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update processing in step S35, the number of times (for example, two) to check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 through the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure occurs. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37).
When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number updating process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid stressing the interrupt process by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process in step S35 described above includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process even in the timer interrupt process. In order to prevent the value random number update process from being executed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update the interrupt to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update process, and the main process It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38).
Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37).
If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily interrupting (step S39) is performed. A process of outputting the off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum when the RWM is powered off and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ), wait until the power of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the start of the main control means when the power is turned on, and sets a predetermined waiting time for waiting the start of the slave control device (game control device 100), and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation section (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, and the initialization operation section being operated. It is provided with an initialization unit (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

FIG. 11 shows the types of model designation commands that are one of the commands transmitted in steps S25 and S30. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, model type A as a plurality of model types having different control contents such as the probability of a big hit, the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in a short-time state, the kind of big hit, distribution, and distribution of effects. There are four types: ~D. Further, each model type includes a plurality of types having different model names. For example, the model type A includes three types of model names A-1, A-2, and A-3.

In the game control device 100, any one of the plurality of model types is set, and also one of the plurality of model names included in the model type is set. .. The model designation command is different depending on the model type and model name, and when the power is turned on, the model designation command corresponding to the model type and model name set in the game control device 100 is transmitted to the effect control device 300. ..

The effect control device 300 can grasp the model type and model name set in the game control device 100 based on the received model designation command. Then, on the display device 41, a default symbol corresponding to the received model designation command is displayed. Thus, by checking the display on the display device 41 when the power is turned on, the model type and model name of the model can be confirmed.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the command is composed of MODE and ACTION, and in the model designation command, MODE is a value indicating that it is a model designation command (05H in this case), and ACTION corresponds to the model type and model name. It has become a value. For example, when the model type is A and the model name is A-1, the model designation command with MODE of 05H and ACTION of 61H is transmitted as the model designation command. Then, in the production control device 300, on the basis of receiving the model designation command in which the MODE is 05H and the ACTION is 61H, it is understood that the model name is the model name A-1 in the model type A, and the default symbol is displayed on the display device 41. 131 is displayed.

In the default design, the upper two digits correspond to the model type and the lower one digit corresponds to the model name, so that the model type and model name can be easily confirmed. Of course, the default design is not limited to that shown in FIG. 11, and can be set arbitrarily. However, it is also possible not to use a symbol (for example, 767) that is a combination of reach or a symbol (for example, 777) that is a combination of big hits. Further, the default symbol may be a symbol combination that can appear in the decorative special image variable display game, or may be a symbol combination that does not appear in the decorative special symbol variable display game. Further, each of the symbols included in the default symbol may be a symbol other than the identification information of the decorative special figure variable display game in part or in whole. Further, the default design is a design corresponding to the model type and model name, but may be a design corresponding to only one of the model type and the model name.

Further, the second default symbol may be displayed after the default symbol corresponding to the model type and the model name is displayed for a certain period of time. The second default symbol may be any pattern, for example, it may be a common symbol regardless of the model type and model name, and the appearance may be the same for gaming machines of the same model but different model types. .. Further, the second default symbol may be a symbol common to other models. Moreover, you may make it possible to set a 2nd default symbol in a game store.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 12 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the above-mentioned main process. In this checksum calculation processing, first, the start address of the calculated address is set to the start address of the RWM (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and "0" is set to the calculated value (step S53). .. The number of bytes of the RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and the checksum is calculated. It is determined whether the calculation of is completed (step S57). When the calculation is not completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above process is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 13 shows the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the above-mentioned main process. In this initial value random number update processing, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62), and the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), The initial value random number updating process ends.
Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, and the "hit initial value random number" is the random number that determines the hit of the general symbol variation display game. The random number that is the initial value of the “winning symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the universal figure variation display game. In this way, the randomness of random numbers can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. The timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt is generated in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing the register saving process of moving the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM.
Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different.
Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed.

Next, based on the output data set in various processes, drive control of actuators such as solenoids (lower special winning opening solenoid 38b, upper special winning opening solenoid 39b, universal electric solenoid 37c, lever solenoid 38f) is performed. Output processing (step S104) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of launch permission as seen from the game control device, and the second signal indicating the state of launch permission seen from the payout control device (the launch permission signal) is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the firing control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both of them are allowed to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, a payout command transmitting process (step S105) for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 by various processes, a random number updating process 1 (step S106), and a random number updating process 2 (step S107).
Next, whether or not there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the universal gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower special winning opening switch 38a, and the upper special winning opening switch 39a. This is performed, and a winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S108) is performed to monitor whether or not the front frame or the glass frame is open.

Next, it is determined whether an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S109). Abnormal discharge error means that the discharge from the upper flow path 38j is detected although the game ball existing in the upper flow path 38j is 0, or the game ball existing in the lower flow path 38k is 0. Nevertheless, it is to detect the discharge from the lower channel 38k (see FIG. 81). If an abnormal discharge error is occurring, the abnormal discharge error flag is set.

If an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S109; Y), the process proceeds to step S113. That is, the game is prevented from proceeding.
If the abnormal discharge error is not occurring (step S109; N), the special figure game processing for performing the special figure changing display game (step S110) and the general figure game processing for performing the general figure changing display game (step) S111), the segment LED edit processing (step S112) is performed which drives the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying the special figure variation display game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents.

Next, the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step S113), the magnet irregularity monitoring process (step S114) for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is an abnormality, and the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 are performed. A board radio wave irregularity monitoring process (step S115) is performed to check and determine whether there is any abnormality. Then, an external information editing process (step S116) of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is ended.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt return. At this time (at the end of timer interrupt processing), it is automatically performed. Depending on the CPU to be used, there is also a gaming machine in which it is necessary to instruct execution of a process of restoring the interrupt prohibited state or a process of restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of the bit is cleared (step S122).

Then, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), and the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124). ), and prepares the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM (step S125). After that, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is an inverted bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S127), and a switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or another memory.

Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). After that, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is an inverted bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S132), a switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process ends.

The unused bit data and the bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 are different data, but as a result, they may be data of the same value. is there.
Further, although the bit data to be inverted in the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted in the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, it is possible that the bit data has the same value as a result. is there.

[Switch reading process]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and the port input state of the target switch control area is saved. (Store) (step S144). After that, it waits until the delay time until the second reading (for example, about 100 μsec) elapses (step S145).

When the delay time has elapsed, the state of the signal taken in the target input port is read a second time (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and the port input state (1 The second data) is loaded, and the inverted data (second data) is saved (stored) in the port input state (step S149).
After that, a deterministic bit pattern in which the bit having the same state is 1 and the bit having a different state is 1 is created in the first and second readings (step S150), the logical product of the deterministic bit pattern and the port input state is calculated, and this time is determined. Bits (step S151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern in which the bit having the same state is 0 and the different bit is 1 is created in the first read and the second read (step S152), and the logic of the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt is created. The product is obtained and set as the previous holding bit (step S153). This makes it possible to obtain the state of the signal from which noise due to chattering of the switch is removed.
Then, the current confirmed bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved as the current committed state (step S154), the exclusive OR of the previous and current committed states is taken, and the rising edge is saved (step S155). , Switch read processing ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 msec), the switch is read once for each interrupt processing and compared with the result of the previous reading to obtain the signal. There is a method of judging whether or not there is a change, but if it does so, correct judgment may not be possible if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost by the time of the next interrupt processing. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the output process, first, OFF data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b, the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b, the universal electric solenoid 37c, and the lever solenoid 38f is combined and output (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step S163). S164). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, "door/frame open" data, "security signal" data) is output to a digit/external information output port. The data is output to 136 (step S166).

Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output output port 135 (step S168). As a result, the plurality of light emitting display units provided in the collective display device 50 are controlled by dynamic control.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S169), and the combined data (for example, "big hit signal 1" data, "big hit signal 2" data, "big hit signal 3" data, "big hit signal" 4” data, “symbol confirmation frequency signal” data, “starting mouth signal” data, “main prize ball signal” data) and launch permission output data are combined (step S170), and the combined data is obtained. The external information/launch permission signal is output to the output port 137 (step S171).
Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. Yes (step S172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S173).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. Yes (step S174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S175). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S176), the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the payout command transmission process, it is first checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided.
The number-of-wins counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on a prize ball command.

The number-of-wins counter area 2 is for transmitting a main award ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of award balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning a prize in a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). In the area to be used, winning data corresponding to the prize balls for which the main prize ball signal has not been generated is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 constitutes a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main award ball signal, the payout award ball signal is also output to the external device every time the number of award balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor illegal payouts by comparing these two signals.

In each of these prize number counter areas, there is a prize number counter area for each number of prize balls set for each prize hole (in the present embodiment, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding prize number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The prize number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the prize number counter area 2 so that more prize data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200, which is the destination, so that more untransmitted This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in each of the three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the fourteen prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1. The three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the fourteen prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2 are each configured to store up to 255 prizes.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the number-of-wins counter area 2 (step S181), “0” is set in the number-of-wins counter area to be checked, out of the plurality of number-of-wins counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. Determine whether there is a count number that is not.
Then, if there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas have been checked. The determination is made (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count (step S181; Y), the count in the target prize count counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target prize count counter area 2 is displayed. The payout amount corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S187). As the value of the remaining award ball area before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main award ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. If the number is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the number of remaining prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S191), and the process returns to step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information about the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of the game balls to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of the game balls is concentrated during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, and the exact result of the big hit occurs. It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of special prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processing of steps S181 to S191 is processing of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the processing of steps S192 to S201 is processing of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). When the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. When the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. If the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control, the payout busy signal indicates an on state (busy state). To be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal serves as a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

When the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmitting process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out the prize ball. If it is in a state, it is configured to send a payout command. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. We are trying to prevent this and reduce the burden of control.

Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy state) are, for example, during payout operation, during ball lending operation, during shot ball out error, overflow error, during frame radio wave illegal occurrence, payout ball detection switch (paid ball). The number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (the number of award balls not paid out = the number of remaining game balls remaining) ) Is present (when not equal to 0), etc.

When the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195), “0” is set in the winning number counter area to be checked among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. Determine whether there is a count number that is not.

Then, if there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196) to check whether the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas have been checked. The determination is made (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is updated. The payout amount command corresponding to the address is acquired (step S199). Then, the obtained payout number command is written into the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 msec, for example, is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) indicating whether the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. In this case, the prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means.

In this way, the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. A ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not yet been paid out will be held in the game control device 100 side, so that it will be backed up in the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs and backed up in the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without the function for performing.

In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, a function for backing up is required, which causes a problem of cost increase. According to the present invention, it is possible to realize accurate payout control without providing the payout control device 200 with a function for backing up.

Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, it is possible to output the main prize ball signal without delay, and the external device such as the hall computer does not pay the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, and for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since a prize ball command counter capable of storing information about the prize ball command and a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

From the above, while performing the game control comprehensively, the winning area provided in the game area 32 (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, first special variation winning device 38, the second. A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the special variation winning device 39), and a payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control device. The payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling is provided, and the game control means outputs a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. ) Is performed to control the sending of the prize ball command to the payout control means, and when a power failure occurs and the power failure is recovered, a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means. Even if it is, it corresponds to that the state signal indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control is not continuously transmitted to the payout control means immediately and is continuously output for a predetermined period. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

In addition, a plurality of prize areas having different numbers of prize balls (starting prize hole 36, normal variable prize device 37, general prize hole 35, first special variable prize device 38, second special variable prize device 39) are provided in the game area 32, The game control means (game control device 100) is provided with a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying, for each number of prize balls, whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls has not been transmitted. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started, and when each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The state signal is used to specify whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control before specifying whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. Will be.

In addition, while performing the game control comprehensively, to a predetermined winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37, general winning opening 35, first special variation winning device 38, second special variation winning device 39) A game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on a winning of a game ball, and a payout control means (payout control) that performs payout control of a game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. Control device 200), and the game control means indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means and indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. If there is a prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means, and information regarding the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the game ball in a predetermined winning area. An external information output means (game control device 100) for outputting the award ball signal (main award ball signal) including the external information output means (game control device 100), and the external information output means, the state signal output from the payout control means, This means that the payout control means outputs the prize ball signal regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives the prize ball command even if the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started in the event of a power failure and recovery from the power failure. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200) and the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started in response to the award ball command corresponding to the state continuing for a predetermined period. This means that the information is sent to the payout control means.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100), the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information on the prize ball command, and the prize capable of storing information on the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). With a ball signal counter (game control device 100), the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) has a predetermined prize area (starting prize hole 36, normal variation prize device 37, general prize hole 35, first). The special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39) generate a prize ball command in units of one winning, and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. It is configured to transmit a command to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store the information of the prize in units of one prize in a predetermined prize area. That is, the number of award ball commands that have not been transmitted is updated by updating the game balls at the time of winning in a predetermined prize area and by transmitting the award ball command to the payout control means. The memorizable external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the prize winning of the game balls into a predetermined prize area, and outputs a prize ball signal each time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. It is configured to output to the outside, the prize ball signal counter can store the information of the prize in units of one prize in the predetermined prize area, and is updated when the game ball is prized in the predetermined prize area. By performing the update in association with the cumulative processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not been subjected to the cumulative process.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 19 shows the random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that is the target of the initial value random number update process. In this random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).

When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether or not the hit random number of the universal symbol is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).
If the big hit symbol random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S211; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number is handled. The start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in the register (start value setting register) (step S213). Then, it is determined whether or not the hit random number of the universal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

When the hit random number of the universal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the hit random number of the universal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).
Further, when the hit random number of the universal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the loaded random number of the hit figure is initialized next time. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) which holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). After that, it is determined whether or not the hit symbol random number of the general figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

When the hit symbol random number of the general figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), the random number update process 1 is ended.
If the hit symbol random number of the universal symbol is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the hit symbol random number of the loaded universal symbol is loaded. The next initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219), and the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 20 shows the random number updating process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 1) as the fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the random number update process 2 updates both of them. The update target is switched and processed each time an interrupt occurs. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update processing is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determination random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. Is configured to.

In the random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which random number among a plurality of random numbers to be updated is the target of the current update process is updated (step S231). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. When the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when it is “1”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when it is “2”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper) is changed. The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is “3”, the variable pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has completed one round.

Subsequently, for example, the CPU used as the gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as “R register”) used for refreshing the DRAM, etc. In addition, a counter called "M1 counter" that operates in the same manner as the R register is built in, and the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). Randomness can be added to the random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter.
Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). Note that the mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, and the lower 1 bits of the M1 counter are updated when updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). Then, when the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the value left by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the additional value (hereinafter, this Is referred to as a "masked value") is set to a mask update value obtained by adding "1", the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as the added value ( The process proceeds to step S238) and step S239. It should be noted that the reason for adding "1" to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before addition, so to avoid it. is there.

Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), and proceeds to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value and the value (1) of the random number area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. (Byte) is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step S243). When the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; N), the new random number value is saved in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number value is set as the new random number value again (step S244), and this value is set to 1 The data is saved in the lower random number area of the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 ends. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random number value (if a new new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in the higher random number area of the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), and the random number update process 2 ends.
In the case of the present embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated on the effect random number update table (1 byte random number, 2 byte random number (upper), 2 byte random number (lower)) , The address of the update area, etc. are defined for each type of random number to be updated (4 blocks).

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of special figure 1 and special figure 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls to the starting winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37. It constitutes a random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number.

[Winning prize switch/Status monitoring processing]
FIG. 21 shows the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning opening switch/state monitoring process, first, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the winning opening switch (upper winning opening switch 39a) in the upper winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is prepared (step S301), the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S302) is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize in the upper prize hole even though the upper prize hole is not open and to detect a normal prize.

In the winning hole monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, the fraudulent winning error notification command, the fraudulent winning Information on the number upper limit (the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations) and the address of the winning opening switch table is defined. In addition, in the winning table of the winning port monitoring table, in addition to the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1, and a winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The information of the lower address of is defined. The prize hole monitoring table is prepared in accordance with each switch to be monitored.

After that, a prize hole monitoring table corresponding to the prize hole switch (lower prize hole switch 38a) in the lower prize hole (first special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and is monitored for illegal prizes. In addition, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S304) of detecting a normal prize is executed.

Next, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the ordinary electric prize (ordinary variation winning device 37) is prepared (step S305), and an abnormal winning is monitored and a normal winning is made. The fraud & winning prize detection process (step S306) to be detected is executed.
Then, a winning opening monitoring table of a winning opening switch that can always win (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36 and the winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35) is prepared (step S307), and the winning number is obtained. The winning number counter updating process (step S308) for updating is executed.

Next, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose status is to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of this embodiment, the status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.
Then, the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. The state monitoring based on the detection signal 1 is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", the state monitoring based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. It

Next, the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine status check process (step S313) for determining a status such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, when the value of the status scan counter is “0”, it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. State monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", state monitoring is set based on the signal output from the main frame opening detection switch 64. Further, when the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the frame radio signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314), and if the value of the status scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the process proceeds to step S318. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.
If the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine determines the status such as whether an error has occurred. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like. The state monitoring based on the detection signal 2 is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

After that, the payout control device 200 performs a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control can be started, and then proceeds to step S318. Note that the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", and therefore is executed once for every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 msec, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 msec.

Next, a V abnormal passage monitoring process (step S318) for monitoring the detection of an abnormal input at the probability variation operation area switch 38d is performed, and a remaining ball monitoring process for monitoring the game balls remaining in the upper flow path 38j (step S319). I do. Further, the discharge ball monitoring process (step S320) for monitoring the game balls remaining in the lower flow path 38k is performed, and the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is ended.

[Illegal & prize monitoring processing]
FIG. 22 shows the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above-described winning a prize switch/state monitoring process. This fraud & prize monitoring processing is performed by the lower special winning opening switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper special winning opening switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. This is a process performed on the other side. For the special winning opening (first special variation winning device 38, second special variation winning device 39) or Hoden (normal variation winning device 37), open the opening/closing member forcibly and insert the game ball to pay out the prize ball. Since fraud is likely to occur, the fraud is monitored in addition to the detection of winning.

In the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch of the error monitoring target is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period during which the flag of the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period is set when the winning opening switch of the error monitoring target is the lower special winning opening switch 38a. If it is the upper special winning opening switch 39a, it is a period during which the flag for the upper special winning opening fraud monitoring period is set, and if the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, it is a hit in the ordinary figure. It is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is executed based on the above.

When the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323). If there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the process proceeds to step S332. If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target number of illegal prizes is updated by +1 (step S324), and the updated number of illegal prizes is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations of the monitoring target. It is determined whether there is any (step S325).

In the case of the present embodiment, the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations is set to 5 regardless of the type of winning hole switch that is the object of error monitoring, but the number of fraudulent occurrences is different for each type of winning hole switch. You can also
The number of judgments is set to five, for example, when the big winning opening in the open state or the Poden is closed, the game ball is caught between the big winning opening and the opening/closing member of the Poden, and the game ball is won. This is to prevent it from being determined to be illegal when a prize is won after the valid period of the mouth switch has passed or when a signal has noise, and to not easily determine an error even if it is not illegal.

If the number of fraudulent winning prizes is not equal to or more than the fraudulent occurrence determination number of monitoring targets (step S325; N), the winning prize monitoring table of the target winning prize switch is prepared (step S330).
If the number of fraudulent prizes is equal to or more than the fraudulent occurrence determination number of the monitoring target (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent prizes is limited to the fraudulent occurrence determination number (step S326), and the initial value is set in the target fraudulent prize notification timer area. (For example, 60000 msec) is saved (step S327). Next, a target fraud command is prepared (step S328), a fraud prize generation flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338). ).

On the other hand, when it is not during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), the prize-winning port monitoring table of the target prize-winning port switch is prepared (step S330), and the winning number counter updating process (step S331) for setting the prize ball is performed. If the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S332). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.
Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S333), and if the value is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step S333; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the target fraud cancellation command is prepared (step S334), and the fraud prize cancellation flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step S335). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).

If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in this fraud & prize monitoring process, the number of illegal prizes of interest is cleared ( In step S337, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338).
If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value in the fraud flag area (step S338).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S338; Y), the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process ends.
If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S339), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S340), the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process ends. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in accordance with the occurrence of an error, and an illegal prize winning error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in response to the error cancellation, and the start and end of error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning prize counter update process]
FIG. 23 shows the winning number counter updating process (steps S308 and S331) in the above-mentioned winning port switch/state monitoring process and fraud & winning monitoring process. In the prize number counter updating process, first, the number of prize hole switches to be monitored is acquired from the prize hole monitoring table (step S351), and it is determined whether or not there is an input (correctly, a change in input) to the target prize hole switch. The determination is made (step S352).

When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362).
If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether it overflows (step S355). When the overflow has not occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). When an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S354, the counter for prize balls (payout command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0 to 65535).

After loading the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether the overflow occurs (step S359). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). , It is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362). If an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0 to 255).

When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step S362; N), the process returns to the process (step S352) of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is finished (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is finished. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Game machine status check process]
FIG. 24 shows the gaming machine status check processing (steps S311, S313, S316) in the above-described winning opening switch/status monitoring processing. In this gaming machine status check processing, first, the status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter is acquired (step S371), and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

Information corresponding to the status scan counter is defined in the status monitoring table (winning prize switch/game machine status monitoring table prepared in the status monitoring process). This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bit of the target signal, and the signal. ON determination data, status off command (error notification end command in case of error system), status on command (error notification start command in case of error system), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer Contains the comparison value.

If the target signal is not on (step S372; N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step S373), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S374). After that, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S375), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S379). When the target signal is not ON (step S372; N), it means that the error signal is not an error (normal), and the signal from the touch switch indicates that the signal is not touched. is there.

On the other hand, when the target signal is ON (step S372; Y), the state ON flag is prepared as the state flag (step S376), and the target state ON command is acquired and prepared (step S377). After that, the target state-on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S379). When the target signal is on (step S372; Y), it means that the error signal is an error (abnormal or illegal), and the signal from the touch switch is touching. Is a state indicating.

When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step S379; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382). , It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or larger than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383).
If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal status (step S379; N), that is, if the signal status has changed, the current signal status is saved in the target signal control area ( Step S380). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S381), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S382). Step S383).

When the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N), the gaming machine state checking process is ended.
If the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1, and the value is kept at the comparison value -1 (step S384). The status flag that is set is compared with the value in the target status flag area (step S385).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check processing ends.
If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the effect command setting process is executed. After performing (step S387), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. As a result, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in step S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 25 shows the payout busy signal check processing (step S317) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring processing. In the payout busy signal check processing, first, it is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

When the payout busy signal is ON (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and an ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (step S393), It is determined whether the value in the busy signal status area matches the current signal status (step S396). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S394), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (step S395). , It is determined whether or not the value in the busy signal status region matches the current signal status (step S396). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interrupts.

If the value in the busy signal status area does not match the current signal status (step S396; N), the current signal status is saved in the busy signal status area (step S397) and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. Then (step S398), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).
If the value of the busy signal status area matches the current signal status (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400), and if it is not greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The pay-out busy signal check process ends. Further, when it is equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1, and the value is kept at the comparison value -1 (step S401), and prepared in step S392 or step S394. The state flag is saved in the pay-out busy signal flag area (step S402), and the pay-out busy signal check processing is ended.

By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the status of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, but the busy signal status is changed if the changed status continues for the signal confirmation time. It is hard to be affected by such as.

Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and becomes indefinite until any signal state continues for the signal fixing time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the power failure is restored, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the award ball command and surely recognizes that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the award ball command, thereby performing the payout control corresponding to the award ball command. You can prevent it from being lost.

[V abnormal passage monitoring processing]
FIG. 26 shows the V abnormal passage monitoring process (step S318) in the winning port switch/state monitoring process described above. In the V abnormal passage monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the probability variation operating region 38h is valid (step S411). The probability variation operating area 38h being valid means that the detection of the game ball by the probability variation operating area switch 38d is treated as valid (see FIG. 8). If the probability variation operating region 38h is valid (step S411; Y), the process proceeds to step S418. If the probability variation operating region 38h is not valid (step S411; N), it is determined whether the probability variation operating region switch 38d has an input (step S412).

Then, when there is no input to the probability variation operating region switch 38d (step S412; N), the process proceeds to step S418.
Further, when there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch 38d (step S412; Y), the processing relating to the V abnormal passage error occurrence after step S413 is performed. The lever member 38i can flow into the probability variation operating region 38h only when the lever member 38i is retracted from the probability variation operating region 38h. Then, the period in which the probability variation operating region switch 38d is valid is started by the lever member 38i being in the retracted state, and the game ball that has flowed in after the lever member 38i covers the probability variation operating region 38h is the probability variation operating region. The process is terminated when a predetermined time sufficient to be detected by the switch 38d has elapsed, or when the lever member 38i is in a state of covering the probability variation operating region 38h. Therefore, when the probability variation operating region switch 38d is not valid, the input to the probability variation operating region switch 38d is an abnormal state that does not normally occur, and the process relating to the V abnormal passage error is performed.

In the process related to the V abnormal passage error occurrence, first, the initial value (here, a value corresponding to 60 seconds) is saved in the V abnormal passage notification timer area (step S413), and the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is set to the error occurrence flag. Is determined (step S414).
When the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is the error occurring flag (step S414; Y), that is, when the error has already occurred, the V abnormal passage monitoring process is ended.

If the value in the V abnormal passage flag area is not the error occurring flag (step S414; N), that is, if it is determined that there is an error in this processing, the error occurring flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area ( In step S415, a V abnormal passage occurrence command is prepared (step S416). After that, effect command setting processing is performed (step S417), and the V abnormal passage monitoring processing ends. The effect control device 300 performs a process of notifying an error when the V abnormal passage occurrence command is received.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S418, it is determined whether the V abnormal passage notification timer is 0 (step S418).
Then, when the V abnormal passage notification timer is 0 (step S418; Y), the V abnormal passage monitoring process ends. In this case, the V abnormal passage error is not occurring.
If the V abnormal passage notification timer is not 0 (step S418; N), the V abnormal passage notification timer is updated by -1 (step S419), and it is determined whether the V abnormal passage notification timer has become 0 (step S420). ).

When the V abnormal passage notification timer is not 0 (step S420; N), the V abnormal passage monitoring process ends. In this case, the notification of the V abnormal passage error continues.
When the V abnormal passage notification timer has reached 0 (step S420; Y), the normal flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area (step S421) and the V abnormal passage cancel command is prepared (step S422). .. Then, the effect command setting process is performed (step S423), and the V abnormal passage monitoring process is ended. The effect control device 300 performs a process of ending the error notification when the V abnormal passage cancel command is received.

[Remaining ball monitoring process]
FIG. 27 shows the remaining ball monitoring processing (step S319) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring processing. In the remaining ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the passage opening switch 38g that detects the game ball that has not flown into the probability variation operating region 38h (step S431). When there is no input to the passage switch 38g (step S431; N), the process proceeds to step S433. If there is an input to the passage opening switch 38g (step S431; Y), -1 is updated if the remaining ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is not 0 (step S432), and step S433. Move to.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch 38d (step S433), and if there is no input (step S433; N), the process proceeds to step S435. If the probability variation operation area switch 38d has an input (step S433; Y), the remaining ball counter managing the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is updated by -1 if it is not 0 (step S434), The process moves to S435.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (step S435), and if there is no input (step S435; N), the process proceeds to step S438.
If there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (step S435; Y), the remaining ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the upper channel 38j is updated by +1 (step S436), and the remaining ball monitoring timer area is displayed. The timer initial value is saved (step S437), and the process proceeds to step S438. The remaining ball monitoring timer is for determining a remaining ball error when the game ball stays in the upper flow path 38j for a long time. Here, the initial value is set to be a time sufficiently longer than the time taken from the flow into the upper flow path 38j to the discharge thereof without any abnormality. Further, here, the value is updated by -1 in the following processing, so that the value of +1 corresponding to 3 seconds is saved as the initial value so that 3 seconds can be timed.

Next, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step S438), and when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step S438; Y), that is, when there is no game ball in the upper flow path 38j, the remaining ball counter. An error releasing flag is prepared (step S444), and a remaining ball error releasing command is prepared (step S445). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S446).

On the other hand, if the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step S438; N), that is, if there is a game ball in the upper flow path 38j, it is determined whether a remaining ball error has already occurred (step S439). When the remaining ball error is already occurring (step S439; Y), the remaining ball monitoring process is ended. When the remaining ball error has not already occurred (step S439; N), the remaining ball monitoring timer is updated by -1 (step S440), and it is determined whether the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S441).

When the remaining ball monitoring timer is not 0 (step S441; N), the remaining ball monitoring process ends. When the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S441; Y), the remaining ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step S442), and the remaining ball error occurrence command is prepared (step S443). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S446).

When the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step S446; Y), the remaining ball monitoring process is ended.
If the prepared state flag does not match the value in the remaining ball error flag area (step S446; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the remaining ball error flag area (step S447), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S448), the remaining ball monitoring process is ended. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting the error notification based on the reception of the remaining ball error occurrence command, and a process of ending the error notification based on the reception of the remaining ball error release command.

That is, by the above processing, if all the game balls have not been discharged from the upper flow path 38j even after a lapse of a predetermined time (here, 3 seconds) from the last flow of the game ball into the upper flow path 38j, the remaining remains. It is determined to be a ball error. As a result, it is possible to prevent an illegal act such as leaving a game ball (thread fishing ball) with a thread left in the upper flow path 38j.

[Discharge ball monitoring process]
FIG. 28 shows the discharge ball monitoring process (step S320) in the winning port switch/state monitoring process described above. In this discharge ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting the game balls discharged from the lower flow path 38k, that is, the game balls discharged from the first special variation winning device 38. (Step S451). When there is no input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S451; N), the process proceeds to step S453. If the discharge confirmation switch 38e has an input (step S451; Y), -1 is updated if the discharge ball counter for managing the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is not 0 (step S452), and step S453. Move to.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the passage opening switch 38g that detects a game ball that has not flown into the probability variation operating region 38h (step S453), and if there is no input (step S453; N), the process proceeds to step S456. To do. If there is an input to the passage opening switch 38g (step S453; Y), the discharge ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step S454), and the discharge ball monitoring timer area has a timer. The initial value is saved (step S455), and the process proceeds to step S456.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the probability variation operating region switch 38d that detects the game ball that has flown into the probability variation operating region 38h (step S456), and if there is no input (step S456; N), the process proceeds to step S459. .. If there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch 38d (step S456; Y), the discharge ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the lower channel 38k is updated by +1 (step S457), and the discharge ball monitoring timer area is set. The timer initial value is saved (step S458), and the process proceeds to step S459.

The passage opening switch 38g and the probability variation operation area switch 38d also have a function as a switch for detecting a game ball flowing into the lower flow path 38k, and the discharge ball counter is incremented by +1 based on the detection of the game ball by these switches. Update and save the timer initial value in the discharge ball monitoring timer area. The discharge ball monitoring timer is for determining a discharge ball error when the game ball stays in the lower flow path 38k for a long time. Here, the initial value is set to a time that is sufficiently longer than the time it takes from the flow into the lower flow path 38k to the discharge thereof without any abnormality. Further, here, the value is updated by -1 in the following process, so that the value of +1 corresponding to 3 seconds is saved as an initial value so that 3 seconds can be timed.

Next, it is determined whether the discharge ball counter is 0 (step S459), and when the discharge ball counter is 0 (step S459; Y), that is, when there is no game ball in the lower flow passage 38k, the discharge ball is discharged. An error releasing flag is prepared (step S465), and a discharge ball error releasing command is prepared (step S466). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step S467).

On the other hand, if the discharge ball counter is not 0 (step S459; N), that is, if there is a game ball in the lower flow path 38k, it is determined whether a discharge ball error has already occurred (step S460). Then, when the discharge ball error is already occurring (step S460; Y), the discharge ball monitoring process ends. If the discharge ball error has not already occurred (step S460; N), the discharge ball monitoring timer is updated by -1 (step S461), and it is determined whether the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S462).

When the discharge ball monitoring timer is not 0 (step S462; N), the discharge ball monitoring process ends. When the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step S462; Y), the discharge ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step S463), and the discharge ball error occurrence command is prepared (step S464). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step S467).

When the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharge ball error flag area (step S467; Y), the discharge ball monitoring process is ended.
If the prepared state flag does not match the value in the discharge ball error flag area (step S467; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the discharge ball error flag area (step S468) and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S448), the discharge ball monitoring process is ended. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting the error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error occurrence command, and a process of ending the error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error cancellation command.

That is, by the above processing, if all the game balls have not been discharged from the lower flow passage 38k even after a lapse of a predetermined time (here, 3 seconds) from the last flow of the game balls into the lower flow passage 38k, the discharge is performed. It is determined to be a ball error. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent an illegal act such as leaving a game ball (thread fishing ball) with a thread left in the lower flow path 38k.

[Special game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process relating to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure game process, first, a starting port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, if a game ball is won in the normal winning a prize device 36 that forms the starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as a big hit random number) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning. Before the start of the figure variation display game, a game result pre-judgment for pre-judging a game result based on a prize is performed.

Next, the upper special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this upper special winning opening switch monitoring processing, processing for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the upper special winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39 is performed.
Further, the lower special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A3) is performed. In this lower special winning opening switch monitoring processing, processing for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the lower special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 is performed.

After that, the probability variation operation area switch monitoring process (step A4) is performed. In the probability variation operating area switch monitoring process, processing for monitoring the detection of the game ball by the probability variation operating area switch 38d provided in the probability variation operating area 38h is performed.
Next, the remaining ball processing timer update processing (step A5) is performed. In the remaining ball processing timer update processing, processing for managing the special winning opening remaining ball processing time set after the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are closed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A6). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A7).
If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A7; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, refer to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A8), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game processing number is acquired using the table (step A9). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A10).

In step A10, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the variation start setting and effect setting of the special figure variation display game and the special figure variation are in progress. Special figure normal processing (step A11) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
In step A10, if the special figure game process number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure and the information necessary for performing the special figure displaying process are performed. (Step A12) is performed.

In step A10, if the special figure game processing number is "2" and the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the type of big hit, and big winning holes for each big hit The special figure display processing (step A13) is performed to set the fanfare time according to the opening pattern and the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing.

In step A10, if the special figure game process number is "3", the opening time of the special winning opening is set, the number of times of opening is updated, and the information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process is set. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step A14).
In step A10, if the special figure game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the jackpot round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if the jackpot round is the final round, and the special winning opening remains. A special winning opening opening process (step A15) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.

In step A10, if the special figure game process number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening and a big hit end process are executed. The special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A16) for setting the information necessary for the execution is performed.
When the special figure game process number is "6" at step A10, a big hit ending process (step A17) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure normal process.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A18), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A19) relating to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A20), the symbol fluctuation control processing (step A21) concerning the special figure 2 indicator 52 is done. After that, a lever solenoid control process (step A22) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed, and the special figure game process is ended.
On the other hand, in step A7, when the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A7; N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A18 and the subsequent processes are performed. To do.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, in the starting opening switch monitoring processing, first, a first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, and then, 1 It is determined whether or not there is a winning in the starting opening (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning in the first starting opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not it is during special time saving (during normal power support) (step A104). ).

When it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. .. That is, in the time saving state, a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) must be left-handed to win, and the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37) must be right-handed to win. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the right-handed state is more advantageous in the gaming state than the left-handed state, but when there is a winning in the first starting mouth during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). In addition, the right control instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) for instructing the right control. Next, a table for setting information on hold by the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) is prepared (step A107), and special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, the winning starting monitoring table for the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37) is prepared (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning at the second starting opening. The determination is made (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting opening (step A111; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning in the second starting opening (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric auditors (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, the ordinary variation. It is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is operated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which a prize can be won (step A112), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric auditors are operating (step A112; Y), step The processing shifts to A114 and the subsequent processing is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the illegal electric power generation is occurring (step A113).

In the determination as to whether or not the regular electric fraud has occurred, it is determined that the fraud has occurred if the number of illegally awarded prizes for the normal variable winning a prize device 37 is equal to or greater than the fraud occurrence determination number (for example, 5). The normally variable winning device 37 cannot win the game ball in the closed state, and can only win the game ball in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number thereof is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. When the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In step A113, when it is determined that the illegal power generation is not occurring (step A113; N), a table for setting information on hold by the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37) is prepared (step A114), The starting port switch common process (step A115) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring process is ended.
Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the unauthorized use of general electric power is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second starting memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-mentioned start opening switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, the non-winning information of the starting opening to be monitored among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37) is displayed. After setting (step A121), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122).
Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends.
On the other hand, when there is an input to the starting port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124). ..

When there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, when the random number is not extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends.
When the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted is loaded into the hard random number latch register to be monitored and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37), the winning information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition processing is performed. finish.

[Common processing for special drawing start switch]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 32, in the special figure starting port switch common processing, first, information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is displayed in the gaming machine 10. The number of times the starting port signal is output, which is the number of times to output to the external management device, is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step A133). ).
When the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" due to +1 update, so it is determined not to be updated when it is determined that the output count overflows.

Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure suspension (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value (step A135).
If the number of reserved special figure to-be-updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing is ended.
If the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A135; Y), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1 ( (Step A136), a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is prepared (step A137), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A138).

Next, the target starting opening winning flag is saved (step A139), the address of the random opening storing area corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations is calculated (step A140), and prepared in step A125. The big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step A141). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the starting mouth switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A142), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A143).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A144), and the address of the fluctuation order flag storage area corresponding to the total of the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number is saved. Is calculated (step A145), and the target variation order flag is saved in the calculated area (step A146). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting memory and the second starting memory are consumed in the order of occurrence, and the variation order flag storage areas 1 to 8 corresponding to the digestion order are used as variation order flags as a special figure 1. Alternatively, the information of FIG. 2 is stored to manage the starting sequence of starting memory.
After that, the special figure holding information determination process (step A147) for determining the information about the starting memory before the start memory is exhausted is completed, and the special figure starting port switch common process is ended.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game balls into the starting winning area and the starting winning area of the normal variation winning device 37 and becomes the right to execute the variation display game. As a starting memory, a starting memory means for storing a predetermined number at the upper limit is formed. Further, the starting storage means (game control device 100) uses various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as a first starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Various random number values that are stored and extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37) are stored as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination processing]
Next, details of the special figure reservation information determination process (step A147) in the above-described special figure starting port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetch process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 33, first, a low-probability determination flag is prepared for performing determination based on the determination value in the low-probability state (step A151), and pre-reading jackpot determination processing is performed (step A152).
Then, when the result of the pre-reading big hit determination processing is a big hit (step A153; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target opening switch is set (step A154), and the big hit symbol prepared in step A142. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A155), and the process proceeds to step A157.
If the result of the pre-reading big hit determination processing is not a big hit (step A153; N), that is, if it is a hit, stop symbol information of the hit is set (step A156), and the process proceeds to step A157.

Then, the stop symbol information is saved in the symbol information area (step A157), and the read-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and the stop symbol information is prepared (step A158), and the production command setting process is performed. Is performed (step A159). As a result, the determination result in the low probability state is transmitted to the performance control device 300.

Next, a high-probability determination flag is prepared for performing determination based on the determination value in the high-probability state (step A160), and pre-reading big hit determination processing is performed (step A161).
Then, when the result of the pre-reading big hit determination process is a big hit (step A162; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target opening switch is set (step A163), and the big hit symbol prepared in step A142. The stop symbol information corresponding to the random number is acquired (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A166.
Moreover, when the result of the pre-reading big hit determination processing is not a big hit (step A162; N), that is, when it is a hit, stop symbol information of the hit is set (step A165), and the process proceeds to step A166.

Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure high probability (high probability state) is in progress (step A166), and when it is not in the special figure high probability (step A166; N), the process proceeds to step A168. In addition, when it is in the special figure high probability (step A166; Y), the stop symbol information is saved (overwritten) in the symbol information area (step A167), and the process proceeds to step A168.
After that, a read-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A169). Thereby, the determination result in the high probability state is transmitted to the performance control device 300.

Next, a special figure information setting process (step A170) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A170). A171). Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A172), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step A173), the special figure reservation information determination process is ended. The special figure information setting process in step A170 and the variation pattern setting process in step A171 are similar to the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the prefetch target, and the prefetch variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are It is prepared and transmitted to the performance control device 300. As the prefetch stop symbol command, commands corresponding to the determination result in the low probability state and the determination result in the high probability state are transmitted. As a result, the determination result (pre-reading result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or not and the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. The device 300 can be informed, and in particular, by changing the decoration special drawing start memory display displayed on the decoration special drawing start memory display section 42 of the center case 40, from the start timing of the special figure changing display game. It is possible to notify the player of the result related information in advance.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained or not). Judgment whether or not) forms a pre-judgment means. Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the winning prize when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

[Pre-reading big hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the pre-reading big hit determination process (steps A152 and A161) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination process will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the prefetch big hit determination process, first, a lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step A181), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A182). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A182; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A187), and the pre-reading big hit judgment processing is ended.
When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A182; N), it is judged whether the judgment flag is the high probability judgment (step A183).

When the determination flag is the high probability determination (step A183; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step A184), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value. (Step A186).
If the determination flag is not the high probability determination (step A183; N), that is, if the determination flag is the low probability determination flag, the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A185), and the value of the target jackpot random number is the upper limit. It is determined whether it is larger than the determination value (step A186).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A186; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A187), and the pre-reading big hit judgment processing is ended. When the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A186; N), that is, when it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the judgment result (step A188), and the prefetch big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Upper prize winning slot switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the upper special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, in the upper special winning opening switch monitoring processing, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the special winning opening opening processing is being performed (step A191). ). When the special winning opening opening process is being performed (step A191; Y), the process proceeds to step A193. If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A191; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step). A192).

When the special winning opening remaining ball process is being performed (step A192; Y), the process proceeds to step A193. If the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A192; N), the upper special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. The special figure game processing number does not shift until the special figure game processing timer becomes “0”, and thus the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number.

Then, it is determined whether or not the upper special winning opening is in operation (step A193). The operation of the upper special winning opening means that the second special variable winning device 39 may detect a winning. The possibility of detecting the winning includes not only the open state in which the opening/closing door 39c is operated and the game ball can be won, but also a predetermined period after the open state is converted to the closed state. .. When the special winning opening is not in operation (step A193; N), the upper winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. Further, when the special winning opening is in operation (step A193; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 39a (step A194).

When there is no input to the upper special winning opening switch (step A194; N), the upper special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If there is an input to the special winning opening switch (step A194; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A195), and effect command setting processing (step A196) is performed. As a result, the effect control device 300 can execute an effect according to the winning of the second special variation winning device 39.
Then, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening process is being performed (step A197). When the special winning opening opening process is not being performed (step A197; N), the upper special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the special winning opening is being processed (step A197; Y), the special winning opening count number is updated by +1 (step A198), and the special winning opening count number reaches the upper limit value (the prize can be won in one round. The number of game balls, for example, "9") or more is determined (step A199).

When the special winning opening count number is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (step A199; N), the upper special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
In addition, when the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (step A199; Y), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A200), and the upper special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. As a result, the second special variation winning device 39 is closed and one round is completed.

[Shimodai winning opening switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the lower special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A3) in the above special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 36, in the downward special winning opening switch monitoring processing, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the special winning opening opening processing is in progress (step A201). ). When the special winning opening opening process is being performed (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A203. If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step S201). A202).

When the special winning opening remaining ball process is being performed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A203. When the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A202; N), the lower special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. The special figure game processing number does not shift until the special figure game processing timer becomes “0”, and thus the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game processing number.

Then, it is determined whether or not the lower special winning opening is in operation (step A203). The operation of the lower special winning opening means that the first special variable winning device 38 may detect a winning. The possibility of detecting a prize includes not only the open state in which the opening/closing door 38c is operated and the game ball can be won, but also a predetermined period after the open state is changed to the closed state. .. When the lower special winning opening is not in operation (step A203; N), the lower special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the lower special winning opening is operating (step A203; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch 38a (step A204).

When there is no input to the lower special winning opening switch (step A204; N), the lower special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (step A204; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A205), and effect command setting processing (step A206) is performed. As a result, the effect control device 300 can execute an effect according to the winning of the first special variation winning device 38.
Then, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening process is being performed (step A207), and when the special winning opening opening process is not being performed (step A207; N), the lower special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the special winning opening is being processed (step A207; Y), the special winning opening count is updated by +1 (step A208), and the special winning opening count is the upper limit value (the prize can be won in one round. The number of game balls, for example, "9") or more is determined (step A209).

When the special winning opening count number is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (step A209; N), the lower special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
In addition, when the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (step A209; Y), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A210) and the special figure per end pointer area to the hit end pointer value. Is loaded and saved in the control pointer area for hitting a special figure (step A211), and the lower special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the first special variation winning device 38 is closed and one round is completed.

[Probability change area switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the probability variation operating area switch monitoring process (step A4) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, in the probability variation operating region switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the probability variation operating region 38h is valid (step A221). The probability variation operating area 38h being valid means that the detection of the game ball by the probability variation operating area switch 38d is treated as valid (see FIG. 8). If the probability variation operating region 38h is not valid (step A221; N), the probability variation operating region switch monitoring process ends. When the probability variation operating region 38h is valid (step A221; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the probability variation operating region switch 38d (step A222).

Then, when there is no input to the probability variation operating region switch 38d (step A222; N), the probability variation operating region switch monitoring process ends.
If the probability variation operation area switch 38d is input (step A222; Y), a probability variation operation area passing command is prepared (step A223), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A224). As a result, in the effect control device 300, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the fact that the game ball has flown into the probability variation operation area 38h.

Next, it is determined whether the big hit symbol is a V easy symbol (step A225). The V-easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, 4R probability variation. In the case of a big hit with these symbols, the lower V opening is performed, so that the game ball will almost certainly flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit by 5R normal or 4R normal, which is not a V easy symbol, the lower short is opened, and thus it is rare that the game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h.

When the big hit symbol is the V easy symbol (step A225; Y), the probability variation operating region normal passage information is set (step A226), and the set information is saved in the probability variation operating region passage information region (step A228). ), and ends the probability variation operation area switch monitoring process.
If the big hit symbol is not the V easy symbol (step A225; N), the probability variation operating area irregular passage information is set (step A227), and the set information is saved in the probability variation operating area passage information area (step A229). ), and ends the probability variation operation area switch monitoring process.

[Remaining ball processing timer update processing]
Next, the details of the remaining sphere processing timer update processing (step A5) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, in the remaining ball processing timer update processing, first, the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing timer for managing the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing time which is the remaining ball processing time for the second special variable winning device 39. Is 0 (step A231).

And, when the special winning opening remaining sphere processing timer is 0 (step A231; Y), that is, when the upper special winning opening remaining sphere processing time which is the remaining sphere processing time for the second special variable winning device 39 is not in progress. Moves to step A235.
Moreover, when the special winning opening remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A231; N), that is, when the special winning opening remaining ball processing time is in progress, the special winning opening remaining ball processing timer is updated by -1 ( (Step A232), it is determined whether the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing timer has become 0 (step A233).

When the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A233; N), the process proceeds to step A235.
Further, when the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing timer becomes 0 (step A233; Y), the setting at the end of the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing time is performed (step A234). With the setting at the end of the processing time for remaining balls in the special winning opening, the special electric auditors 1 operating signal is set to OFF, the opening status flag for the special winning opening is cleared, and the flag for fraudulent monitoring of the special winning opening is saved. To do.

Next, it is determined whether the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing timer that manages the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing time which is the remaining ball processing time for the first special variation winning device 38 is 0 (step A235).
When the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A235; N), that is, when the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing time is in progress, the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing timer is updated by -1. (Step A236), it is determined whether the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing timer has become 0 (step A237).

When the lower special winning hole remaining ball processing timer is not 0 (step A237; N), the remaining ball processing timer update processing is ended.
Further, when the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing timer is 0 (step A237; Y), the setting at the end of the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing time is performed (step A238). In the setting at the end of the processing time of the lower prize hole remaining ball processing, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF, the lower prize hole opening state flag is cleared, and the flag of the lower prize hole illegal monitoring period is saved. To do.

After that, it is determined whether the lever solenoid is stopped (step A239), and when the lever solenoid is stopped (step A239; Y), the remaining ball processing timer update processing is ended. The state where the lever solenoid is stopped is a state set when the first special variation winning device 38 is opened except in the first round, that is, when the lever solenoid 38f is kept in the OFF state. In this case, the lever solenoid 38f does not operate after the remaining ball processing time elapses, and hence the processing relating to the operation of the lever solenoid 38f after the remaining ball processing time elapses is not performed.

If the lever solenoid is not stopped (step A239; N), the remaining ball monitoring operation information is saved in the lever solenoid information area (step A240), and it is determined whether the number of remaining balls is 0 (step A242). ).
When the number of remaining spheres is not 0 (step A242; N), the remaining sphere processing timer updating process ends. In this case, the operation of monitoring the remaining ball of the lever solenoid is maintained.

If the number of remaining balls is 0 (step A242; Y), the lever solenoid at the end of the remaining ball monitoring is set (step A243), and the remaining ball processing timer updating process is ended. In the setting of the lever solenoid at the end of the remaining ball monitoring, the stopped information is saved in the lever solenoid information area, and the stopped value is saved in the control pointer of the lever solenoid control area. Also, the control timer area in the lever solenoid control area is cleared to zero.

On the other hand, when the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing timer is 0 (step A235; Y), that is, when the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing time has already ended, the lever solenoid is performing the remaining ball monitoring operation. Is determined (step A241).
Then, when the lever solenoid is not performing the remaining ball monitoring operation (step A241; N), the remaining ball processing timer updating process is ended.
If the lever solenoid is performing the remaining ball monitoring operation (step A241; Y), the process proceeds to step A242. In this case, when the number of remaining balls becomes 0 (step A242; Y), the lever solenoid is set (step A243) at the end of remaining ball monitoring, and the operation of the lever solenoid 38f ends.

Through the above processing, the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing time and the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing time are managed. The timer that manages the processing time of the remaining balls in the upper prize hole and the processing time of the lower balls in the lower prize hole is at least a timer different from the special figure game processing timer in order to manage the opening time of the special variation winning device in the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to manage the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing time and the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing time in parallel with the progress of the special game state. In other words, it is possible to manage the opening time of the special winning opening device of one of the special variation winning devices and the processing time of the remaining winning ball of the special winning opening of the other special variation winning device.

If you try to control the interval time and the subsequent special winning opening remaining ball processing time with one special figure game processing timer, the special figure game processing timer will manage the interval time after managing the openable time in the round. After that, the processing time of the big winning opening remaining ball processing is managed to manage the openable time of the next round, so the time between rounds becomes long. If the time between rounds is shortened, the processing time for processing the remaining big balls will also be shortened, so that the regular winning tends to be treated as invalid. On the contrary, if the processing time for processing the special winning hole remaining ball is increased to prevent such a situation, there is a problem that the time between rounds becomes longer and the speed of digesting the special game state is sacrificed.

In addition, since the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are alternately opened, a sufficient amount of time for processing the upper winning hole remaining ball and the lower winning hole remaining ball processing time are always secured. It becomes possible to do. And after these special winning hole remaining ball processing time ends, the fraud monitoring period is set until the special variable winning device that has been subject to the processing of the special winning hole remaining ball processing time is opened. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of damage even if there is an illegal act of awarding a game ball to the special variable winning device that maintains the closed state after the end of the ball processing time.

From the above, the game is controlled in the gaming machine which executes the variable display game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates the special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is the special result. With the game control means (game control device 100), the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 38 which can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win in the special game state and an open state in which the game ball can win. The device 39 is provided, and the game control means opens one of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 in each round in the special gaming state composed of a plurality of rounds. , The first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are controlled to open alternately in each round by changing the special variable winning device opened in each round, and the opening in the round ends. Based on the above, it controls to start the special winning opening remaining ball processing time, which treats the detection of the game balls that have flowed into the special variable winning device opened in the round as a normal winning, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing time is at least This means that a timer different from the timer (special figure game processing timer) for managing the opening time of the special variation winning device in the special game state is used to measure the time.

Therefore, since the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are alternately opened, it is possible to secure the processing time for the special winning opening remaining balls with respect to the closed special variation winning device, and the remaining big winning opening balls. Since the processing time and the opening time of the special variable winning device are managed independently, it is possible to properly manage the closing time of the special winning opening remaining ball of the other special floating winning device while opening the one special floating winning device and close it. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the special variation winning device inside.

In addition, the game control means (game control device 100), during the period from the end of the special winning opening remaining ball processing time to the opening of the special variation winning device targeted for the special winning opening remaining ball processing time. This means that the winning of the special variable winning device is invalidated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent cheating during the special gaming state.

[Normal processing of special drawings]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (step A11) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the special figure normal process, first, it is determined whether both the special figure 1 reserved number (first starting memory number) and the special figure 2 reserved number (second starting memory number) are “0”. Yes (step A301). If both the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number are not "0" (step A301; N), that is, if at least one of the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number is not 0, the variable order flag A flag is loaded from the storage area (for a total of 1 reserves) (step A302), and it is determined whether or not there is a change in special figure 1 (step A303).

When the information of the special figure 1 is stored in the variation of the special figure 1 (step A303; Y), that is, when the information of the special figure 1 is stored in the variation order flag storage area (for the total number of reserved ones), A corresponding decorative special figure reservation number command is prepared (step A304), and effect command setting processing (step A305) is performed. At this point in time, the special figure 1 reserved number has not been subtracted, so a decorative special figure reserved number command corresponding to the current value of the special figure 1 reserved number-1 is prepared. Then, the special figure 1 variation start processing (step A306) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended.

On the other hand, when it is not the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is stored in the variable order flag storage area (for the total number of reserved ones), it corresponds to the number of special figure 2 reserved A decorative special figure reservation number command is prepared (step A307), and effect command setting processing (step A308) is performed. At this point in time, the special figure 2 reserved number has not been subtracted, so a decorative special figure reserved number command corresponding to the current value of the special figure 2 reserved number-1 is prepared. Then, the special figure 2 variation start processing (step A309) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended.

When both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step A310), and the customer waiting demo is displayed. If it has been started (step A310; Y), the process proceeds to step A314. If the customer waiting demo has not started (step A310; N), the customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A311). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A312), and effect command setting processing (step A313) is performed.

Next, "0" related to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A314), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A315), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared ( Step A316). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper special prize mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A318). Figure Normal processing ends.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start processing (step A306) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 40, first, the special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol determination flag area (step A321). Next, a game number command corresponding to the value of the game number area for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for changing the effect mode is prepared (step A322), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A323).

After that, the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a big hit is subjected to a big hit flag 1 setting process (step A324) for setting deviation information and big hit information. Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A325) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A326) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A327). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A328) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A329) is performed.

Next, "1" is set as the process number (step A330), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A331). Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A332), and the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A333). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A334), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is set in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area ( Here, 100 ms) is set (step A335), the initial value (here 0) is set in the special figure 1 variable symbol number area (step A336), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

The initial value to be set in the special figure 1 variable symbol number area is 0, whereby the variable display will be started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special map 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start processing (step A309) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same as the process of the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

As shown in FIG. 41, first, a special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the variation symbol determination flag area (step A341). Next, a game number command corresponding to the value of the game number area for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for changing the effect mode is prepared (step A342), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A343). After that, a big hit flag 2 setting process (step A343) for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is a big hit is performed.

Next, after the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A345) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol information which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A346) is performed to prepare the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A347). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A348) for setting a variation pattern that is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A349) is performed.

Next, "1" is set as the processing number (step A350), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A351). Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A352), and the signal related to the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A353). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step A354), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is set in the special figure 2 blink control timer area ( Here, 100 ms) is set (step A355), an initial value (here, 0) is set in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (step A356), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

The initial value set in the special figure 2 variable symbol number area is 0, so that the variable display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A324) in the above-mentioned Toku-zu 1 variation start process. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A361). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and prepared (step A362), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0. (Step A363). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the earliest special figure 1 starting memory in the special figure 1 in the digestion order. After that, a jackpot determination process (step A364) for determining whether or not it is a jackpot depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A364) is a jackpot (step A365; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the deviation information is saved in step A361 (step A366). ), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A364) is not a big hit (step A365; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is any one of “big hit” and “outlier”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 43 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A344) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting processing, first, deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (Step A373). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random number, etc.) about the earliest special figure 2 starting memory in the special figure 2 in the digestion order. After that, a jackpot determination process (step A374) is performed to determine whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

When the result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is a jackpot (step A375; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area in which the deviation information is saved in step A371 (step A376). ), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is not a big hit (step A375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is any one of "big hit" and "off".

[Big hit determination processing]
FIG. 44 shows the big hit determination processing (steps A364 and A374) in the big hit flag 1 setting processing and the big hit flag 2 setting processing described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A387), and the big hit judgment process is ended.
When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; N), it is judged whether or not it is in the high probability state (step A383). Then, in the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ). If it is not in the high probability state (step A383; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ..

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A357), and the big hit judgment process is ended. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; N), that is, if it is the big hit, the big hit is set as the judgment result (step A388), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 45, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A325) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process is shown. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1 Jackpot random number is loaded from (for) (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (step A403), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired, and saved in the special design 1 stop design number area (step A404). By this processing, the type of special result is selected.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop design information table is set (step A405), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41.
Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A407). Either 12R, 5R, or 4R is set as the round number upper limit value information area.
Then, the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step A408), and the process proceeds to step A411. The special winning opening opening information is information defining an opening pattern (see FIG. 7) in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling off is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A409), and the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then (step A410), the process proceeds to step A411. By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (step A411), the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A412), and effect command setting processing (step A413) is performed. This decoration special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300.
Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A414), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step A415), and the special figure 1 The stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
46, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A345) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process is shown. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1 Jackpot random number is loaded from (for use) (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step A433), the stop design number which corresponds to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired, and it is saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area (step A434). By this processing, the type of special result is selected.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step A435), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41.
Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437). Either 12R, 5R, or 4R is set as the round number upper limit value information area.
Then, the special winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special winning opening opening information area (step A438), and the process proceeds to step A441. The special winning opening opening information is information defining an opening pattern (see FIG. 7) in the special gaming state.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling off is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A439), and the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then (step A440), the process proceeds to step A441. By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop design pattern is prepared (step A441), the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A442), and effect command setting processing (step A443) is performed. This decoration special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300.
Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A444), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step A445), and the special figure 2 The stop symbol setting process ends.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36), and the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning It constitutes a variable display game executing means for executing the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special map information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting process (steps A170, A326, and A346) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing, special figure 1 variation start processing, and special figure 2 variation start processing will be described. In the special figure information setting process as shown in FIG. 47, first, the variable group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the variable group selection pointer corresponding to the probability state and the stop symbol pattern number is acquired (step A452). .. The stochastic state is one of the three states of a low-probability state and not a short-time state, a high-probability state and a short-time state, and a low-probability state and a short-time state. Further, the stop symbol pattern number is any of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the outlier symbol, the 12R probability variable symbol, the 5R probability variable symbol, the 5R normal symbol, the 4R probability variable symbol, and the 4R normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is the off symbol (step A453), and if it is not the off symbol (step A453; N), that is, if it is the big hit symbol, the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area ( (Step A455), and the special figure information setting process ends.
If the symbol is out of alignment (step A453; Y), the variable group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the total value of the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number (step A454), and the variable group selection pointer. The pointer is saved in the area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process ends.
That is, when the result is a big hit, the variation pattern is selected without considering the starting memory number, and when the result is out of consideration, the variation pattern is selected considering the starting memory number. Note that in step A454, the variable group selection pointer is updated in consideration of which of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 is to be processed and the current effect mode.

For example, when the production mode is the normal mode and the processing target is the special figure 1, the variable group selection is performed in consideration of whether the total number of holdings is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 to 8. Update the pointer. In addition, when the processing target is the special figure 2 when the effect mode is the normal mode, the variable group selection pointer is updated without considering the total number of reservations.
When the production mode is other than the normal mode and the processing target is the special figure 1, the variable group selection pointer is updated without considering the total number of holding numbers, and when the production mode is other than the normal mode. When the processing target is the special figure 2, the variable group selection pointer is updated in consideration of whether the total number of reserved numbers is 0 to 1 or 2 to 8.
It should be noted that when the total number of holding numbers is 0, the starting memory occurs when there is no starting memory (during customer waiting demonstration) and the special figure variable display game is started, and the total number of holding numbers is 1. In this case, the special figure variation display game is started with one starting memory.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing, special figure 1 variation start processing, and variation pattern setting processing (steps A171, A328, A348) at the start of special figure 2 variation will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group address table is set (step A461), the address of the fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation group selection pointer is acquired and prepared (step A462), The fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (step A463).

Then, a 2-byte allocation process (step A464) is performed to obtain the address of the fluctuation pattern selection table obtained as a result of the allocation, and the address is prepared (step A465), and the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (reserved number) The variable pattern random number 2 is loaded from (for 1) and prepared (step A466). Then, the distribution process (step A467) is performed, the variation pattern number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the variation pattern number area is saved, and the variation pattern setting process ends. By this processing, the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game such as presence/absence of reach and type of reach is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

[2-byte sorting process]
FIG. 49 shows the 2-byte allocation process (step A464) in the above-described fluctuation pattern setting process. The 2-byte sorting process is a process for selecting a variation pattern selection table of the special figure variation display game from the variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution processing, first, it is checked whether the leading data of the selection table (the variable group table prepared in step A462) is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step A471). Here, the fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one fluctuation pattern selection table, but a fluctuation group table that defines only the fluctuation pattern selection table in which the fluctuation pattern is “no reach” In (for example, some variation group tables when the result is out of alignment), since distribution is not necessary, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the beginning.

When the first data of the selection table (variable group table) is a code without distribution (step A472; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step A477), and distribution of 2 bytes is performed. The process ends.
On the other hand, when the leading data of the selection table (fluctuation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A472; N), one distribution value first defined in the selection table (fluctuation group table) is acquired ( Step A473).

Subsequently, the distribution value acquired in step A473 is subtracted from the random value prepared in step A463 (the value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) to calculate a new random value (step A474), and the calculated new random value is calculated. It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than "0" (step A475).
Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A475; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A476), the process proceeds to step A473, and thereafter. Perform processing. That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (fluctuation group table) is acquired (step A473), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A475 to generate a new random value. A numerical value is calculated (step A474), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A475).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A475 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A475; Y). As a result, any one variation pattern selection table is selected from at least one variation pattern selection table defined in the selection table (variation group table).
If it is determined in step A475 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A475; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result is updated (step A477), and the 2-byte sorting process is performed. To finish.

The distribution process of step A467 in the above-described variation pattern setting process is the same as the above-mentioned 2-byte distribution process. However, the program instructions for calculation differ in that the size of the random number used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps A329 and A349) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 are cleared (step A491).
Next, the fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A493). After that, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared (step A494), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A495).

Next, the special symbol reservation number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (step A496), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is set (step A497). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A498), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step A499). Then, the variation order flag storage area is shifted (step A500), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A501), and the variation start information setting process is ended.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a fluctuation pattern determination means capable of determining the fluctuation pattern of the identification information executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decorative special figure variation display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information on the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. A variable command including information about a pattern is given, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step A12) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the special figure changing process, first, as the information for stopping the variable display, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is prepared (step A601), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A601). A602).
Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, the display time is set to 800 msec when the stop symbol pattern is the disengaged symbol pattern, and the display time is set to 2000 msec when the stop symbol pattern is the big hit symbol pattern. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

After that, the process number "2" relating to the process during special figure display is set (step A605), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A606).
Next, the signal related to the end of fluctuation of special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 during changing signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal related to end of fluctuation of special figure 2 (eg, special design) 2 Turn OFF the changing signal) to the test signal output data area (step A608), and the control timer initial in the symbol determination number signal control timer area related to the number of times the special figure variation display game for output to the external information terminal is executed. The value (for example, 256 msec) is saved (step A609).

After that, as a control information of the first special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, a stop flag related to a variation stop on the special figure 1 display device 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A610), as the information for controlling the second special figure variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, save the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 2 display device 52 in the special figure 2 variation control flag area. (Step A611), the special figure displaying process is terminated.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (step A13) in the above special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 52, in the special figure displaying process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process and the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process The big hit flag 2 and the big hit flag 2 set in step S701 are loaded (step A701) to clear the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (step A702).
Then, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A703), and if it is a big hit (step A703; Y), the big hit of the second special figure variation display game (special big hit 2 big hit) is started. Save the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 per signal is ON) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A706), A round number upper limit value table is set (step A707).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A703 that the jackpot flag 2 is not the jackpot (step A703; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is the jackpot (step A704) and the jackpot is the jackpot (step A704). A704; Y), a test signal (for example, a condition device in-operation signal is ON, a role product continuous operation device in-operation signal is ON, which is related to the start of the big hit of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 big hit), The signal per special symbol 1) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A705), and the processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A707) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A707), the round number upper limit value (in the present embodiment, either 12, 5 or 4) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, The data is saved in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (step A708). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A709).

Next, the decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop design pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A710), and effect command setting processing (step A711) is performed.
After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A713) is performed.
Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process (step) A715) is performed.

Next, the special winning opening opening information and a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). After that, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A717). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the big hit fanfare time (here, either 100 ms, 2500 ms or 500 ms) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A718), and the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing 1 (step A719). ) Is performed and the special figure display processing is ended. That is, the game control device 100 is based on the result being a special result in one of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, based on the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning game. It constitutes a special game state generating means for generating a special game state for converting the device 39 to the open state.

On the other hand, in step A704, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A704; N), the time shortening variation number updating process (step A720) for managing the period of the high probability state or the time saving state is performed to set the effect mode. The special figure game information check processing regarding (step A721) is done. Next, "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A722), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A723), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared ( (Step A724) The special figure displaying process is ended.

[Time reduction change count update process]
Next, the details of the time reduction variation number updating process (step A720) in the above-described special figure displaying process will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, in the time shortening variation count updating process, first, it is determined whether or not the special drawing is in a time saving state (during a time saving state) (step A751). When it is not during the special figure time saving (step A751; N), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended. In addition, when the special drawing time saving is in progress (step A751; Y), it is determined whether it is in the special drawing high probability (during high probability state) (step A752). If the special figure high probability is not in progress (step A752; N), the process proceeds to step A757. If the special figure high probability is in progress (step A752; Y), the number of high-probability fluctuations is updated by -1 (step A753), and it is determined whether or not the number of high-probability fluctuations is "0" (step A754). ).

When the number of high-probability fluctuations is not "0" (step A754; N), the process proceeds to step A757. If the number of high-probability fluctuations becomes “0” (step A754; Y), that is, if the high-probability state ends in this special figure fluctuation display game, the high-probability notification flag area is cleared (step A755), the probability variation operation area passage information area is cleared (step A756), and the process proceeds to step A757. The information in the probability variation operation area passage information area will be cleared by this processing or by turning on the power of the gaming machine.

Next, the number of times of time reduction variation is updated by -1 (step A757), and it is determined whether the number of times of time reduction variation becomes "0" (step A758). When the number of times of time shortening variation is not “0” (step A758; N), the processing of updating the number of times of time reduction variation is ended. Further, when the number of time shortening fluctuations becomes “0” (step A758; Y), that is, when the time saving state ends in the current special figure fluctuation display game, a signal related to the time saving end (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned off). ) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A759).

Next, the signal regarding the end of high probability and shortening of time is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the high probability state and the time saving state are both ended by executing the special figure variation display game the same number of times, so when the high probability variation number becomes 0, The number of time shortening fluctuations also becomes 0, and the high-probability state and the time-saving state end at the same time. In step A760, for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, a normal symbol 1 Set the high probability state signal to OFF. In addition, even in the high probability state of the special figure, only the probability state changes in the general figure, so the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Next, save the number without saving time in the game state display number area (step A761), save the universal figure low probability flag in the universal figure game mode flag area (step A762), and draw the special figure in the special figure game mode flag area. The low probability & no time saving flag is saved (step A763). Further, a signal related to a left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A764), and a display LED during right-handed operation (for example, the second gaming state display unit 77) is displayed. In order to turn off the light, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A765), and the time shortening variation number updating process is ended.

[Special game information check process]
Next, details of the special figure game information check process (step A721) in the above-described special figure displaying process will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the special figure game information check process, first, it is determined whether or not the next mode shift information is a non-update code (step A771).
If the next mode transition information is the code without update (step A771; Y), the special figure game information check processing is ended. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games.

If the next mode transition information is not the no-update code (step A771; N), the number of games, which is the maximum number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the production mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A772). It is determined whether the number of times has become “0” (step A773). If the number of games is not "0" (step A773; N), the special figure game information check process is ended. When the number of games has become “0” (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774), and then The address of the table corresponding to the mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

Then, the production mode number of the production mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the production mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the number of games in the production mode to be transferred is acquired, and saved in the number of games area in the RWM. (Step A778), the next mode shift information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the next mode shift information area in the RWM (step A779).
After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A780), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure restoration (step A781), and effect command setting processing ( Step A782) is performed.

Next, a game number command corresponding to the newly set game number is prepared (step A783), effect command setting processing (step A784) is performed, and the special figure game information check processing is ended. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect in which the switching of the effect mode is announced in advance before the specified number of rotations. By managing the effect mode in the game control device 100 in this way, it is possible to perform control such as generating a specific reach only in a specific effect mode, and improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, details of the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing 1 (step A719) in the above-described special figure displaying processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the fanfare/interval interval process transition setting process 1, first, the process number “3” related to the fanfare/interval interval process is set (step A791), and the special figure game process number area is processed. The number is saved (step A792).

Next, a signal regarding the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 The variation time reduction state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A793). In addition, even in the high probability state of the special figure, since only the probability state changes in the general figure, the ordinary symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the ordinary electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.
After that, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A794), the number without saving time is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A795), and the universal figure game mode flag is set. The universal figure low probability flag is saved in the area (step A796).

Then, in order to clear the variable symbol discrimination flag area (step A797) and turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display portion 78) provided on the game board 30 relating to the display of the high probability state, the high probability notification flag The area is cleared (step A798), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A799).

Next, the high probability variation number area for managing the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the high probability state is cleared to 0 (step A800), and the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the time saving state is managed. The time shortening variation number area is cleared to 0 (step A801). Then, the normal mode number is saved in the effect mode number area (step A802), the game number area is cleared to 0 (step A803), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A804). After that, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 upon power recovery (step A805). As a result, the high-probability state and the time saving state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are established. In addition, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

Then, a signal related to the right-handing instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the second gaming state display portion 77) is displayed. In order to turn on the light, the number in the right hit state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing 1 is ended.

[Processing during fanfare/interval]
Next, details of the fanfare/interval processing (step A14) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 56, in the fanfare/interval processing, first, it is determined whether or not the odd round, which is the round for opening the first special variation winning device 38, is started (step A851). (Step A851; N), that is, in the case of an even round in which the second special variation winning device 39 is opened, the process moves to Step A853. In addition, when the odd round is started (step A851; Y), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter that manages the number of game balls remaining in the upper flow path 38j of the first special variation winning device 38 is 0 ( Step A852).

When the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A852; N), the fanfare/interval processing is ended. That is, if the first special variation winning device 38 is opened when the game sphere remains in the upper flow path 38j, the remaining sphere may flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. In particular, immediately after the opening of the first special variation winning device 38, since the game ball is likely to flow into the probability variation operating region 38h, there is a high possibility that a high probability state will occur. Therefore, when there is a remaining ball in the upper flow path 38j, that is, when there is a game ball that may flow into the probability variation operation area 38h that forms a specific area in the first special variation winning device 38, the probability variation is present. The start of the round in which the first special variation winning device 38 is opened is waited until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the operation area 38h. In the case of an even round in which the second special variation winning device 39 is opened, the round is started regardless of the presence or absence of a game ball in the second special variation winning device 39.

If the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A852; Y), the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A853), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A853). A854) and effect command setting processing (step A855).
After that, the special winning opening opening table is set (step A856), the special winning opening opening information and the special winning opening opening data corresponding to the number of rounds are acquired and saved (step A857). The special winning opening release data is data indicating which of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 is to be opened, and an opening mode such as opening time.

Then, it is determined whether or not the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value of the RWM round number upper limit value area (step A858), and the final round. If it is (step A858; Y), the process proceeds to step A863. If it is not the final round (step A858; N), it is determined whether it is the lever solenoid operation round (step A859). The lever solenoid operation round is a round in which the lever solenoid 38f is operated to operate the lever member 38i, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is only the first specific round.

If it is the lever solenoid operation round (step A859; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step A860), and the process proceeds to step A863. As a result, the data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared.

If it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step A859; N), it is determined whether or not the odd round is started (step A861), and if it is not the odd round start (step A861; N), the process proceeds to step A863. .. In this case, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened. If the odd-numbered round is started (step A861; Y), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step A862), and the process proceeds to step A863. In this case, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened, but the lever solenoid 38f is not operated.

After that, the special winning opening opening time corresponding to the special winning opening opening data is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A863), the hit start pointer value corresponding to the special winning opening opening data is acquired, and the special drawing is being hit. The data is saved in the control pointer area (step A864). Further, the hit end pointer value corresponding to the special winning opening release data is acquired and saved in the special figure per end pointer area (step A865), and it is determined whether the odd round starts (step A867).

If the odd round is not started (step A867; N), the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 is performed (step A868), and the fanfare/interval process is terminated. If the odd-numbered round has started (step A867; Y), the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A868), and the fanfare/interval process ends.

In step A852, it is confirmed whether or not the remaining ball counter is 0. In addition to this, it is confirmed whether or not the discharged ball counter is 0. If it is not 0, the processing after step A853 is not performed. You can That is, the round may be started after it is confirmed that all the game balls in the first special variation winning device 38 have been discharged.

From the above, the game is controlled in the gaming machine which executes the variable display game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates the special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is the special result. The game control means (game control device 100) and a specific area in which the game ball can be flown into the closed state in which the game ball cannot win in the special game state and the open state in which the game ball can win. A first special variation winning device 38 having a probability changing operation area 38h), a closed state in which the game ball cannot win in the special game state and an open state in which the game ball can win, and which does not have a specific area. 2 special variation winning device 39, and, the game control means, based on the game ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 flows into the specific region, than when the game ball did not flow into the specific region It is possible to generate a gaming state that is advantageous to the player after the special gaming state ends, and in the special gaming state composed of a plurality of rounds, in each round, the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device By opening either one of 39 and changing the special variation winning device to be opened for each round, the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are alternately opened for each round. When controlling and starting a round of opening the first special variation winning device 38, it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into a specific area in the first special variation winning device 38. Until the start of the round is to be waited until.

Therefore, since the start of the round in which the first special variation winning device 38 is opened is waited until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the specific area, the fairness of the game can be ensured. ..

In addition, when the game control means (game control device 100) starts the round for opening the second special variation winning device 39, is all the game balls that have flowed into the second special variation winning device 39 discharged? It means that the round is started regardless of whether or not. Therefore, when the second special variation winning device 39 having no specific area is opened, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened without confirming the discharge, so that the special game state can be quickly consumed.

Further, in step A851, it may be determined whether the specific round has started, and whether the remaining ball counter is 0 may be confirmed only when the specific round has started. That is, a game control means for controlling a game in a gaming machine that executes a variable display game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to a player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. In the (game control device 100), in a special game state, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and a specific region into which the game ball can flow (probably variable operation region) 38h), a first special variation winning device 38, and a second special variation that can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won in a special game state and an open state in which a game ball can be won, without a specific area. The prize control device 39 is provided, and the game control means is based on the fact that the game balls that have won in the first special variation winning device 38 flow into the specific region, and thus the player is more likely than when the game ball did not flow into the specific region. It is possible to generate a game state advantageous to the special game state after the end of the special game state. In the special game state composed of a plurality of rounds, the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are formed in each round. By opening either one and changing the special variable winning device that is opened for each round, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are controlled to be alternately opened for each round. , In the special game state, the first special variation winning a prize device 38 is controlled to be executed a plurality of rounds, and the first special variation winning device 38 is opened in a specific round of a plurality of rounds. It is configured to determine whether the game ball that has flowed into the special variation winning device 38 has flown into a specific area, and when starting a specific round, it is possible to flow into the specific area within the first special variation winning device 38. You may make it wait for the start of the said specific round until it is confirmed that there is no game ball with the nature. By doing so, the start of the specific round is waited until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the specific area, so that the fairness of the game can be ensured.

Further, in step A851, it is determined whether the specific round is started or the first special variable winning device 38 next to the specific round is opened, and whether or not the remaining ball counter is 0 only when these rounds are started. May be confirmed. That is, when the game control means (game control device 100) starts the round in which the first special variation winning device 38 is opened after the specific round, the specific region (probability change operation) in the first special variation winning device 38 is started. The start of the round may be waited until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the area 38h). By doing so, the game ball that has flowed in the specific round is on standby until it is determined whether or not it has flowed into the specific region, so that the fairness of the game can be secured.

Further, when the remaining ball counter is not 0, the start of the round is waited, but when the remaining ball counter is not 0, the start of the special game state may be waited. That is, the game control means (game control device 100) does not have a game ball that may flow into a specific area in the first special variation winning device 38 when the result of the variable display game is a special result. You may make it wait for the start of a special game state until it is confirmed. Therefore, the first special variation winning device 38 is not opened until it is confirmed that there is no game ball that may flow into the specific area, and the fairness of the game can be secured.

Further, when it is determined that the remaining ball counter is not 0 at the start of the round in which the first special variation winning device 38 other than the specific round is opened, the second special variation winning device 39 is opened in the round. Is also good. Further, if the specific round is a round other than the first round, and the remaining ball counter is not 0 at the start of the round for opening the first special variable winning device 38 (it may be only at the start of the specific round), the round A plurality of consecutive rounds immediately before the specific round may be set as the round in which the second special variation winning device 39 is opened so as to wait for the start. By doing this, it is possible to secure a sufficient time before the start of the specific round, and it is possible to ensure that the remaining balls have been discharged. Furthermore, a plurality of consecutive rounds immediately after the specific round may be a round in which the second special variation winning device 39 is opened.

[Transition setting process 1 during the process of opening the special winning opening]
FIG. 57 shows the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 (step A868) in the above-described fanfare/interval process. In this special winning opening opening process shift setting process 1, first, the processing number is set to "4" related to the special winning opening opening process (step A871), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A872).
After that, the information of the special winning opening count number area that stores the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A873), and a signal related to the opening of the upper special winning opening (for example, the special electric auditor 1 working signal is turned ON). ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A874).

Then, the upper special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A875), and the upper special winning opening operating information is saved in the upper special winning opening state flag area (step A876).
Next, the upper special winning opening fraud prize number area is cleared to 0 (step A877), the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the upper special winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A878), and the upper special winning opening remaining ball The processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A879), and the special winning opening opening processing shift setting processing 1 is ended.

[Prize winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 58 shows the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 (step A869) in the above-described fanfare/interval process. In this special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2, first, the process number is set to "4" related to the special winning opening opening process (step A881), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game process number area. (Step A882).
After that, the information of the special winning opening count number area that stores the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A883), and a signal related to the opening of the lower special winning opening (for example, the special electric auditors 2 working signal is turned on). ) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A884).

Then, the lower special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A885), and the lower special winning opening operating information is saved in the lower special winning opening state flag area (step A886).
Next, the lower special winning opening fraud prize number area is cleared to 0 (step A887), the fraud monitoring outside period flag is saved in the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A888), and the lower special winning opening remaining ball The processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A889), and the special winning opening opening processing shift setting processing 2 is ended.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
Next, the details of the special winning opening opening process (step A15) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the special winning opening opening process, first, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening opening data has an opening/closing pattern (step A901). The pattern for opening and closing is an opening pattern for opening and closing during one round, and is the lower V opening (see FIG. 8) in the present embodiment.
When the special winning opening opening data has a pattern of opening and closing (step A901; Y), a middle control pointer per special figure is loaded and prepared (step A902). It is determined whether there is any (step A903).

If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the value of the end pointer per special figure (step A903; N), that is, if the opening/closing operation is still performed in the currently executed round, the value of the middle control pointer area per special figure is +1. It updates (step A904), performs a big hit movement transition setting process (step A905), and ends the special winning opening opening process.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the big hit operation shift setting process, a branch process is performed by the special figure middle hit control pointer (step A921).
When the value of the control pointer for hitting the special figure is 0, the wait time (here, 2700 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A922), and the first special variation winning device 38 is closed. The lower special winning opening OFF data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A923), and the big hit operation transition setting process is ended.

When the value of the special figure hitting middle control pointer is 1, the big hit V second half opening time (here, 25000 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A924), and the first special variable winning device 38 is set. To open, the lower special winning opening ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A925), and the big hit operation transition setting process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 59, if the special winning opening opening data is not a pattern for opening/closing (step A901; N) or the loaded value is equal to or more than the value of the end pointer per special figure (step A903; Y), it is being executed. It is determined whether or not the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state with the round number upper limit value of the RWM round number upper limit value area (step A906).

If it is not the final round (step A906; N), the special winning opening data and the interval time (here, 300 ms, 900 ms, or 1300 ms) corresponding to the number of rounds are saved in the special figure game processing timer area ( (Step A907), an interval command is prepared (step A908), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A909). Further, the processing number is set to "3" for the fanfare/interval processing (step A910), and the process proceeds to step A915.

In the case of the final round (step A906; Y), the remaining ball processing time (here, either 1300 ms or 1700 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening data is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A911). ), an ending command is prepared (step A912), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A913). Further, the process number is set to "5" for the special winning opening remaining ball process (step A914), and the process proceeds to step A915.

Then, the special winning opening remaining ball processing time corresponding to the special winning opening opening data and the number of rounds is saved in the special winning opening remaining ball processing timer area (step A915). In this process, when the round to be finished is the round in which the first special variation winning device 38 is opened, the initial value of the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing time is saved in the lower special winning opening remaining ball processing timer area. If the round to be ended is the round in which the second special variation winning device 39 is opened, the initial value of the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing time is saved in the upper special winning opening remaining ball processing timer area.

After that, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A916), and the opening/closing door 38c of the first special variation winning device 38 or the opening/closing door 39c of the second special variation winning device 39 is closed. Off data for turning off the winning a prize solenoid 38b and the upper special winning a prize solenoid 39b is saved in the special winning a prize solenoid output data area (step A917), and the process during the special winning a prize opening is completed. In step A917, the OFF data of the lower special winning opening solenoid 38b and the upper special winning opening solenoid 39b are set, but only the OFF data of the special winning opening solenoid of the opened special variation winning device is set. You may do it.

[Remaining sphere processing of big winning mouth]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball process (step A16) in the above special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 61, in the special winning opening remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball counter for managing the number of game balls remaining in the upper flow path 38j of the first special variation winning device 38 is 0 ( If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A951) (step A951; N), the special winning opening remaining ball processing is ended. That is, until the game balls in the upper flow path 38j of the first special variation winning device 38 are all discharged, the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not performed and the special game state is not ended.

When the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A951; Y), "6" is set as the process number related to the big hit ending process (step A952), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area ( Step A953). Then, the ending time (here, 100 ms, 2300 ms, or 2700 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening opening data is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A954).

Next, the information of the special winning opening count number area that stores the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A955), and the information of the round number area that stores the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A956). ), the information of the round number upper limit value area that stores the upper limit value of the round number in the special game state is cleared (step A957). Then, the information in the special winning opening opening information area that stores the flag for determining the opening information of the special winning opening is cleared (step A956), and the control pointer area in the special figure is cleared (step A957). The end pointer area is cleared (step A958), and the special winning opening remaining ball processing is ended.

From the above, the game control means (game control device 100) may flow into a specific region (probability change operation region 38h) in the first special variation winning device 38 when ending the special game state. This means that the special game state is not ended until it is confirmed that the ball does not exist. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining until the next special game state, and it is possible to secure the fairness of the game. Although it is confirmed in step A951 whether or not the remaining ball counter is 0, in addition to this, it is also confirmed whether or not the discharged ball counter is 0, and if it is not 0, the processing after step A952 is not performed. May be. That is, the special game state may be ended after it is confirmed that all the game balls in the first special variation winning device 38 have been discharged.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit ending process (step A17) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the big hit ending process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1001), and the special game state this time is based on a high probability and a hit in the time saving period. Is determined (step A1002).
If the special game state this time is not based on the high probability & short-time hit (step A1002; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit symbol is the V easy symbol (step A1003). The V-easy symbol is a symbol corresponding to 12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, 4R probability variation.

When the big hit symbol is not the V easy symbol (step A1003; N), the information of the time saving mode B start is prepared as the production mode after the end of the special game state (step A1004), and the process proceeds to step A1006.
In addition, when the special game state this time is based on the hit in the high probability & time saving (step A1002; Y), or when the big hit symbol is the V easy symbol (step A1003; Y), the special game is determined. Information on the start of the time saving mode A is prepared as the effect mode after the end of the state (step A1005), and the process proceeds to step A1006.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is probability variation operation area passage information set when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h (step A1006).
When there is no probability variation operation area passage information (step A1006; N), big hit end setting processing 1 is performed (step A1007), and the process proceeds to step A1010. In this case, the high probability state is not achieved.
If there is probability variation operation area passage information (step A1006; Y), big hit end setting processing 2 is performed (step A1008), and the information prepared as an effect mode after the end of the special game state is set in the ST mode (ST mode A Alternatively, it is replaced with B) (step A1009), and the process proceeds to step A1010. In this case, there is a high probability state. That is, regardless of the big hit symbol, when the game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h, a high probability state is achieved.

After that, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1010), and the address of the table corresponding to the prepared information is acquired (step A1011). Then, from these information, the effect mode number of the effect mode after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved (step A1012), and the number of games in the effect mode after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved ( (Step A1013), next mode transition information of the effect mode after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved (step A1014). Further, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1015), and the command is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A1016).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is a probability variation operating region irregular passage that is the inflow of the game ball into the probability variation operating region 38h in the special game state based on the big hit symbol that is not the V easy symbol (step A1017). Then, if it is not passing through the probability variation operating region irregularity (step A1017; N), the process proceeds to step A1019. When the probability variation operation region irregular passage is performed (step A1017; Y), the irregular probability variation information is added to the probability information command (step A1018), and the process proceeds to step A1019. Then, effect command setting processing is performed (step A1019), and the probability information command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The probability information commands sent here include multiple commands that include performance mode information in either "High probability/shorter time" or "Low probability/shorter time". In the case of, irregular probability variation information is added.
Then, a game number command corresponding to the number of games is prepared (step A1020), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A1021).

Next, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A1022), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1023).
After that, a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, 1 signal of the big hit is turned off, 3 signals of the big hit are turned off, 4 signals of the big hit are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1024), and a signal related to the end of the big hit (eg, The condition device operating signal is OFF, the accessory continuous operation device operating signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 per signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 per signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1025).

Subsequently, the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hits is cleared (step A1026), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1027). The flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the winning hole fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1028). Then, the information in the probability variation operation area passage information area is cleared (step A1029), the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1030), and the jackpot ending process is ended.

If the special game state this time is based on a high probability state or a time saving state, the ST mode may be set as the effect mode regardless of the presence or absence of the probability variation operation area passage information. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the big hit in the first special figure variation display game becomes a V easy symbol with a predetermined probability, when the big hit in the second special figure variation display game becomes a V easy symbol, it becomes all V easy symbols. Become. Since the game progresses by hitting right during the high probability state or the time saving state, basically only the second special map variation display game is executed, and the big hits during the high probability state or the time saving state are all V easy symbols Should be However, in the case of a big hit in the first special figure variation display game based on the first starting memory that existed when the big hit occurred, the V easy symbol is not obtained at a predetermined rate despite the high probability state or the time saving state. Sometimes.

A player who is not familiar with the game contents may understand that the big hits in the high-probability state and the short-time state are all V easy patterns, and may have a distrust of not being in the ST mode. In the case of a big hit in the high-probability state or the short-time state, it is possible to prevent such a distrust by always shifting to the ST mode. Since the ST mode ends without a big hit at a predetermined rate even in a high-probability state, even if the ST mode is set in a low-probability state, a big hit does not occur in the ST mode. Does not occur.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 63 shows the big hit end setting process 1 (step A1007) in the big hit end process described above. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of time saving (for example, two jackpot signals are turned on) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1041). Since the signal related to the start of the time saving is output from the big hit, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area.
Next, a signal regarding the start with low probability & time saving (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is ON, special symbol 2 variation The time shortening state signal is turned ON, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned ON), and the test signal output data area is saved (step A1042).

Next, a number with time saving is saved in the game state display number area (step A1043), a universal figure high probability flag is saved in the universal figure game mode flag area (step A1044), and a special figure game mode flag area is identified. The figure low probability & time saving flag is saved (step A1045). After that, the high probability variation number area is cleared to 0 (step A1046), the initial value (here, 100 times) is saved in the time reduction variation number area (step A1047), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 64 shows the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1008) in the big hit end process described above. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to the start of time saving (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned on) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1051). Since the signal related to the start of the time saving is output from the big hit, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area.
Then, a signal related to the start with high probability & time saving (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is ON, special symbol 2 variation time The shortened state signal is turned ON, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned ON), and the test signal output data area is saved (step A1052).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A1053), save the universal figure high probability flag in the universal figure game mode flag area (step A1054), and save it in the special figure game mode flag area. The figure high probability & time saving flag is saved (step A1055). After that, the initial value (here, 100 times) is saved in the high-probability fluctuation number area (step A1056), the initial value (here, 100 times) is saved in the time shortening fluctuation number area (step A1057), and the big hit end setting is made. The process 2 is ended. Although the game is advanced by right-handing during the time saving state, since it is instructed to make right-handing during the special game state, settings relating to instructing right-handing are made in the jackpot end setting processes 1 and 2. Absent.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a specific game state generation means capable of generating a specific game state (time saving state) for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. Then, in the specific game state, the operation of the normal variable winning device 37 is controlled so that winning in the normal variable winning device 37 is easier than in the specific game state, The first special figure variation display game, the second special figure variation display game, and the general figure variation display game are configured to be reduced in variation time.
Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a high-probability state generation means capable of generating a high-probability state (probability variation state) for a predetermined period set in advance after the end of the special game state.

[Lever solenoid control processing]
Next, details of the lever solenoid control process (step A22) during the special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in the lever solenoid control process, first, it is determined whether or not the lever solenoid control pointer is a non-update code (here, -1) (step A1101). When the lever solenoid control pointer is the code without update (step A1101; Y), the lever solenoid control process is ended. If the lever solenoid control pointer is not the non-update code (step A1101; N), the lever solenoid control timer is updated by -1 (step A1102), and it is determined whether the lever solenoid control timer has become 0 (step A1103). ..

When the lever solenoid control timer is not 0 (step A1103; N), the lever solenoid control process is ended. If the lever solenoid control timer has reached 0 (step A1103; Y), the lever solenoid control table is set (step A1104), and the table address corresponding to the lever solenoid control pointer is calculated (step A1105). Then, the control pointer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control point area (step A1106), the control timer for the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control timer area (step A1107), and the output of the next operation is output. Data is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid output data area (step A1108). After that, the probability variation actuation area validity determination flag is acquired and saved in the probability variation actuation area validity determination flag area (step A1109), and the lever solenoid control process ends.

Through the above processing, the lever solenoid control pointer is sequentially updated every time a predetermined time elapses, ON/OFF of the lever solenoid 38f is set as shown in FIGS. 8C and 8D, and the probability variation operation region is set. The switch 38d is set to be valid or invalid. When the operation of the lever solenoid is ended by satisfying a predetermined condition, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the probability variation operation area switch 38d is invalidated by setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer. Then, after setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer, -1 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the state in which the operation is stopped is continued.

[Production command setting process]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 66, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
When the rendering serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the rendering serial transmission buffer (step A2001).
If the performance serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), command data (MODE) is written in the performance serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status of the production serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
When the rendering serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the rendering serial transmission buffer (step A2004).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), command data (ACTION) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process ends. Note that the effect command setting process may be simply referred to as "command setting process".

[Design fluctuation control processing]
FIG. 67 shows the symbol variation control process (steps A19 and A21) in the special figure game process described above, and the symbol variation control process (step B15) in the universal figure game process described later. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) and ordinary symbols (general symbols) and setting display data of the special symbols and ordinary symbols.

In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag related to the control target symbol (for example, one of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the general symbol) is changing (step A2101). .. In the case of the present embodiment, on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A18, step A20, step B14, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 ( Addresses for stop) and addresses for display table 1 (for fluctuation) are defined.

When the changing flag relating to the symbol to be controlled is changing (step A2102; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2103). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for fluctuation) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A18, step A20, and step B14.
Then, the blinking control timer to be controlled is updated by -1 (step A2104), it is determined whether the updated blinking control timer is "0" (step A2105), and the updated blinking control timer is "0". If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area of the control target is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process ends.

If the updated blink control timer is “0” (step A2105; Y), the blink control timer initial value (here, 100 ms) corresponding to the target blink control timer area is saved (step A2106), The variable symbol number of the controlled object is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (step A2107), and the display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area of the controlled object is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area provided in the RAM 111C (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process ends.

On the other hand, when the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is not changing (step A2102; N), the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2109). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stop) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A18, step A20, and step B14. Next, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the control target is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (step S111) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the general figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process relating to the general figure variable display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 68, in the universal figure game process, first, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the universal electric prize switch for monitoring the input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the universal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the universal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4).

If the value of the universal figure game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, if it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, it is referred to branch to the process corresponding to the universal figure game processing number. A process of setting the universal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number is performed using the table (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the universal figure game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, if the general figure game process number is "0", the start of variation of the general figure variation display game is monitored, and setting of variation start of the general figure variation display game, effect setting, and variation of general figure are performed. The normal/universal process (step B8) is performed to set the information necessary for the process.
When the figure game process number is "1" in step B7, a figure figure changing process (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the figure image displaying process.

In step B7, if the universal figure game processing number is "2", and if the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, setting of the universal battery open time depending on whether or not the state is in the time saving state. In addition, processing for displaying a general figure (step B10) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the processing for displaying a general figure.
Further, in step B7, when the figure game processing number is "3", the figure is hit during the figure hit, the process is continued during the figure hit, or the information necessary for performing the ball remaining ball process is set. Processing (step B11) is performed.

If the universal figure game process number is "4" at step B7, the ordinary electric ball remaining process (step B12) for setting the information necessary for performing the universal figure per end process is performed.
If the figure/universal figure game process number is "5" in step B7, the figure/universal figure end process (step B13) is performed to set information necessary for performing the figure/general figure normal process.

After that, after preparing a universal figure variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display 74 (step B14), a symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the regular symbol by the universal symbol display 74 ( The step B15) is carried out to end the ordinary figure game process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B4 that the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. To do.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described general-university game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the gate switch monitoring process, it is first determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101).
Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not it is in a game state of right-handed hitting (for example, during a big hit, special time saving (during normal power support)) (step B102). ..

If the gaming state is right-handed (step B102; Y), the number of reserved universal figures is acquired and it is determined whether the number of reserved universal figures is less than the upper limit value (for example, "4") (step B105).
If the game state is not right hitting (step B102; N), a left hitting instruction command is prepared (step B103), and after performing the effect command setting process (step B104), the number of universal figure holdings is acquired. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved universal maps is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105).

If the number of reserved universal figures is less than the upper limit value (step B105; Y), the number of reserved universal figures is updated by +1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of retained universal figures is updated. (Step B107). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the hit symbol random number is extracted, and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process is performed. To finish.

Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of universal figure reservations is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N), The gate switch monitoring process ends.

[Prize winning prize switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-mentioned ordinary figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process, first, the ordinary figure winning game is being executed, that is, the ordinary figure changing display game is in a hit state and the ordinary variable winning device 37 is performing a predetermined number of opening operations. It is determined whether there is any (step B201).
Then, if the normal drawing is in progress (step B201; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y). If it is determined, the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the post-update counter is equal to or more than the upper limit value (for example, "6") (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B204; Y). Then, the hit end pointer value (here, 4 or 7) is loaded from the per-universal-drawing end pointer area and saved in the middle-per-universal-control pointer area (step B205). Then, the universal figure game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step B206), and the universal electric prize winning switch monitoring processing is ended. That is, if there is a prize winning over the upper limit in the hit state of the universal figure, the hit state of the universal figure ends at that point.

In addition, when it is determined in step B201 that the normal drawing is not in progress (step B201; N), when it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. When it is determined that the ordinary electric power count number is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B204; N), the ordinary electric power prize switch monitoring processing is ended.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (step B8) in the above-mentioned ordinary figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 71, in the normal/universal figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal figure reservation number is "0" (step B301), and when the normal/universal figure reservation number is "0" (step B301; Y). ) Sets "0" as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B322), and saves the process number in the general figure game process number area (step B323). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B324), and the ordinary figure normal processing is ended.

In addition, when the general figure reservation number is not “0” (step B301; N), a random number is loaded from the RWM per random number storage area (for reservation number 1), per-symbol random number storage area (for reservation number 1). , Per hit random number storage area (for hold number 1), hit symbol random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (step B302). Next, it is determined whether the probability that the hit result in the universal figure fluctuation display game is higher than the normal probability (that is, the low probability of universal figure) is in the high probability of universal figure, that is, is in the time saving state. (Step B303).

If it is not during the high probability of universal figure (step B303; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit determination value) at the time of low probability of universal figure is set (step B304), and if it is during high probability of universal figure (step B303). ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of high probability of universal figure (step B305).
After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number is equal to or more than the upper limit judgment value (step B306), and when the value of the hit random number is equal to or more than the upper limit judgment value (step B306; Y), that is, when it is out of the range, step B308. Move to.

If the value of the hit random number is not greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B306; N), it is determined whether the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307).
If the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step B307; Y), that is, if it is a deviation, the deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (step B308), and the deviation stop symbol number is set (step B309). ), the off symbol information is saved in the universal figure stop symbol information area (step B310), and the stop symbol number is saved in the universal figure stop symbol area (step B314).

On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B304 or B305 (step B307; N), that is, if it is a hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B311). The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the hit symbol random number loaded in B302 is set (step B312), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B313), and the stop symbol The number is saved in the universal figure stop symbol area (step B314). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are two types of winning symbols, a winning symbol 1 which is an opening pattern 1 and a winning symbol 2 which is an opening pattern 2.

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at the time of low probability of universal figure is 0/251, the probability of hitting at the time of high probability of universal figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is “251”, and the lower probability lower limit judgment value is “251”, and the high probability lower limit determination value is “1”. Therefore, at the time of low probability of ordinary figure, there is a deviation when the value of the random number per hit is "0" to "250". Further, at the time of high probability of universal figure, the case where the value of the random number per hit is any of "1" to "250" is a hit, and the case where the value of the random number per hit is "0" is out of range.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the universal symbol stop symbol area (step B314), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B315).
Then, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B316), the vacant area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B317), and the ordinary figure holding number is updated by -1 (step B318). That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game relating to the oldest universal figure hold number 1, a process of advancing the ranks of the universal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 that have been held after the regular figure hold number 1 one by one. I do. By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 for public figures in the random number storage area per general figure to the number of reserved figures of 4 for general figures are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 for general figures in the random number storage area for one figure to 3 for the number of retained figures Will be done. Then, the value for the figure hold number 4 in the random number storage area per figure is cleared, and the figure hold number is decremented by one.

Next, the variation pattern random number 3 is extracted (step B319), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3 is set, and the variation time is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B320). Here, as the variation time, 500 ms is selected at 200/256, 1500 ms is selected at 40/256, and 3000 ms is selected at 16/256.
After that, the normal/universal figure change processing transition setting processing (step B321) is performed, and the normal/universal figure normal processing ends.

[Usage diagram change processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 72 shows the processing for setting transition to normal figure changing processing (step B321) in the normal figure normal processing described above. In this routine figure changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the process number for shifting to the routine figure changing process (step B341), and the process number is saved in the routine figure game process number area ( Step B342).
After that, a signal related to the start of the universal figure variation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 varying signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B343), which indicates that the universal figure variation display game is varying. The changing flag is saved in the universal figure change control flag area (step B344).

Then, the blinking control timer initial value (here, 100 ms), which is the initial value of the blinking cycle timer of the universal figure display 74, is saved in the universal figure blinking control timer area (step B345), and is initialized in the universal figure variation symbol number area. The value (0 in this case) is saved (step B346), and the process of setting the transition to the universal figure changing process ends.

[Processing during fluctuations in general]
Next, details of the routine figure changing process (step B9) in the routine figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in the universal figure changing process, first, the process number is set to "2" as a setting process for shifting to the universal figure displaying process (step B411), and the process number is the universal figure game process number. The data is saved in the area (step B412).
After that, the general figure display time (for example, 600 msec) which is the display time of the result of the general figure fluctuation display game on the general figure display 74 is saved in the general figure game processing timer area (step B413), and the general figure change end is completed. A signal (for example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and a stop flag indicating that the universal figure variation display game is stopped is placed in the universal figure variation control flag area. It saves (step B415), and ends the process of changing the universal figure.

[Processing during normal display]
Next, the details of the processing for displaying a general figure (step B10) in the above-described general figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the normal figure displaying process, first, the hit flag (hit information or deviant information) set in the normal figure normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), "0" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B515), and the process number is saved in the general figure game process number area. (Step B516). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flagging fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the processing for displaying the universal figure ends.

On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hit process setting table is set (step B504), and the hit start pointer value (here, 0 and 5) corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information is set. (Any of the above) is acquired and saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B505). Next, the hit end pointer value (here, either 4 or 7) corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the universal figure end pointer area (step B506), which corresponds to the universal figure stop symbol information. The normal communication opening time (either 1700 ms or 2600 ms here) is acquired and saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B507).

After that, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the processing for hitting a normal figure (step B508), and the processing number is saved in the figure game processing number area (step B509). After that, a signal related to the start of the universal pattern (for example, the signal during the normal symbol 1 hits ON) and a signal related to the start of the universal electric operation (for example, the signal during the normal electric accessory 1 operation ON) are output to the test signal output data area. Save (step B510).
Further, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary electric solenoid, the on-data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (step B511), and the ordinary electric prize number stored in the ordinary variable winning device 37 is stored in the ordinary electric prize number. The information of the area is cleared (step B512), and the information of the illegal pay prize number area in which the number of winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 during the illegal charge monitoring period is stored is cleared (step B513). Then, the flag (outside fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B514), and the processing for displaying the universal figure ends.

[Purpose of medium processing]
Next, the details of the normal figure hitting process (step B11) in the aforementioned general figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the processing for hitting a universal figure, first, a control pointer for hitting a universal figure is loaded and prepared (step B601). It is determined (step B602).

When the value of the control pointer during hitting the universal figure is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer during hitting the universal figure is updated by +1 (step B603), and the normal power operation shift setting process (step B604) is performed. Go and finish the process in the middle of a normal figure.
In addition, when the value of the control pointer during medium-sized drawing is equal to or larger than the upper limit value (step B602; Y), the processing for moving the middle-ranged processing control pointer area during medium-sized drawing is updated by +1 without performing the normal operation. The setting process (step B604) is performed, and the process of hitting a universal figure ends.

[Normal power operation transition setting process]
FIG. 76 shows the normal power operation shift setting process (step B604) in the above-described general-purpose contact process. The normal power operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the normal power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer (control pointer during normal drawing). I am trying. In the normal power operation shift setting process, first, a branch process is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B611). The value of the control pointer used here is the value loaded in step B601 and the value before being updated by +1 in step B603.

If the value of the control pointer is 0, 2, or 5, the process proceeds to step B612 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, and thus the closing of the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer. The later wait time (here, 300 ms) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B612), and the OFF data is saved in the universal electric solenoid output data area to turn off the ordinary electric solenoid 37c (step B613). , The normal operation shift setting process ends.

If the value of the control pointer is either 1 or 3, the process proceeds to step B614 to control the opening of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is opened. The normal power release time (here, 1700 ms), which is the time, is saved in the universal graphic game processing timer area (step B614), and the ON data is saved in the common power solenoid output data area in order to turn on the common power solenoid 37c ( Step B615), and ends the normal power operation shift setting process.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer is 6, the process proceeds to step B616 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37. Therefore, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is Hoden. The open time (here, 2600 ms) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B616), and the ON data is saved in the universal electric solenoid output data area to turn on the ordinary electric solenoid 37c (step B617). The power operation shift setting process ends.

If the value of the control pointer is either 4 or 7, the process proceeds to step B618, the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is terminated, and the normal ball remaining ball process is performed. "4" is set (step B618). Then, this processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (step B619), and the ordinary electric ball remaining ball processing time (600 ms in this case) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B620). After that, in order to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step B621), and the general electric operation shift setting process ends.

FIG. 77 shows the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 controlled by the above-described processing. FIG. 77(a) shows the case where the result is a winning design 1 (opening pattern 1). When the variation time of the universal figure variation display game ends (t81) and the universal figure display time for displaying the winning result elapses (t82), the hit state is started and the normal variation winning device 37 is opened.

In the opening of the normal variation winning device 37, opening of 1700 ms (t82 to t83, t84 to t85, t86 to t87) and closing of 300 ms (t83 to t84, t85 to t86) are alternately performed. When the third opening is completed (t87), the remaining ball processing time is 600 ms (t87 to t88), and then the ending time is 100 ms (t88 to t89). When the ending time ends (t89), the hit state ends and a new universal figure variation display game can be executed.

FIG. 77(b) shows a case where the result is a winning pattern 2 (opening pattern 2). When the variation time of the universal figure variation display game ends (t91) and the universal figure display time for displaying the winning result elapses (t92), the winning state is started and the normal variation winning device 37 is opened.
In the opening of the normal variation winning device 37, 2600 ms is opened (t92 to t93, t94 to t95) and 300 ms is closed (t93 to t94). When the second opening is completed (t95), the remaining sphere processing time is 600 ms (t95 to t96), and then the ending time is 100 ms (t96 to t97). When the ending time ends (t97), the hit state ends and a new universal figure variation display game can be executed.

In addition, in any opening pattern, when a predetermined number (here, 6) of game balls have won the normal variable winning device 37, the opening of the normal variable winning device 37 is finished at that point, and the remaining ball processing is performed. It will be time.

[Universal residual ball treatment]
Next, the details of the normal electric ball remaining ball process (step B12) in the above-mentioned general figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process, first, the process number "5" related to the end process for universal figure is set (step B711), and the process number is saved in the universal figure game process number area ( Step B712).

Next, the universal figure ending time (here, 100 msec) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B713), and a signal relating to the end of the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 (for example, a normal electric auditors product 1 in-operation signal is output). OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the ordinary electric count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B715). Then, the control pointer area for hitting the universal figure is cleared (step B716), the end pointer area for hitting the universal figure is cleared (step B717), and the ordinary electric ball remaining process is terminated.

[Usually end processing]
Next, the details of the per-universal-drawing end process (step B13) in the above-described general-universal-drawing game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 79, in the universal figure ending process, first, the process number "0" related to the universal figure normal process is set (step B811), and the process number is saved in the universal figure game process number area (step S811). B812).

Next, a signal relating to the end of hit of the universal figure variation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 hit signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the fraud monitoring period of the regular variation winning device 37 is defined. The flag (the flag during the fraud monitoring period) to be saved is saved in the general electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B814), and the per-universal-diagram end process is ended.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the general figure hold indicator 75, the first game state display section 76, the second game state display provided on the collective display device 50. The settings relating to the drive of the segment LEDs that form the unit 77, the third game state display unit 78, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

As shown in FIG. 80, in the segment LED edit processing, first, the blink control timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and it is determined whether or not the output is on timing depending on whether the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1 or not. (Step S502). In the present embodiment, when the bit 5 of the blink control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on timing, and thus a blink cycle of 128 msec is created.

If it is the output on timing (step S502; Y), the general figure reservation number display table 1 of the general figure reservation number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the general figure reservation display device is defined is set. (Step S503), if it is not the output on timing (step S502; N), the universal figure reservation number display table 2 is set (step S504). Then, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved universal figures is acquired from the set number of reserved universal figures display table and saved in the segment area for the universal figure reserved display provided in the RAM 111C (step S505). In the present embodiment, if the number of reserved universal figures is any of “0” to “2”, the display data is the same regardless of which of the general figure reserved number display tables is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output on timing (step S506), and if it is the output on timing (step S506; Y), the special figure 1 hold number in which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 reserved number display table 1 is set (step S507), and when the output is not on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 reserved number display table 2 is set ( Step S508). Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number display table is acquired from the set special figure 1 reserved number display table and saved in the segment area for the special figure 1 reserved display device provided in the RAM 111C (step S509).

Then, it is determined whether it is the output on-timing (step S510), and if it is the output on-timing (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 hold number display in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 reserved number display table 1 is set (step S511), and when the output is not on timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2 reserved number display table 2 is set (step S511). S512). Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number display table is acquired from the set special figure 2 reserved number display table, and is saved in the segment area for the special figure 2 reserved display provided in the RAM 111C (step S513).
Furthermore, a round display table that defines the display mode on the round display unit is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and a segment for the round display unit provided in the RAM 111C is provided. The data is saved in the area (step S515).

Next, when the time saving state occurs, the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 76 that lights up and notifies the occurrence of the time saving state is defined (step S516), sets the game state display number. The display data corresponding to is acquired and saved in the segment area for the first gaming state display unit 76 provided in the RAM 111C (step S517). In the present embodiment, the first gaming state display unit 76 including one LED is turned off during normal operation and turned on during special time saving (normal power support).

After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 77 is defined to notify that the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is set (step S518), Display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area for the second game state display unit 77 provided in the RAM 111C (step S519). In the present embodiment, the second game state display portion 77 consisting of one LED is turned off during normal hitting (left hitting), and right hitting (in the case of the present embodiment, during big hits and during normal power support). It is configured to light up.

Then, it is determined whether the high-probability notification flag that is turned on when the jackpot probability state is the high-probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on (step S520), and the high-probability notification flag is turned on. If so (step S520; Y), the off data of the high-probability notification LED (third gaming state display unit 78) is saved in the segment area (step S521), and the segment LED editing process is terminated. If the high probability notification flag is off (step S520; N), the segment LED editing process is terminated without saving the OFF data of the high probability notification LED in the segment area.

[Abnormal discharge monitoring process]
Next, details of the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step S113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the number of game balls existing in each of the upper flow path 38j and the lower flow path 38k is managed, and an abnormal discharge error is generated when the discharge is detected although the number of game balls existing is 0. Performs processing and processing related to cancellation of abnormal discharge error.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the abnormal discharge monitoring process, first, it is determined whether an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S551). When an abnormal discharge error is occurring, the abnormal discharge error flag is set in the abnormal discharge error flag area. judge.
When the abnormal discharge error is not occurring (step S551; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (step S552), and when there is no input (step S552; N), the process proceeds to step S554. To do. If there is an input to the lower special winning opening switch (step S552; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 1 for managing the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is updated by +1 (step S553), and the process proceeds to step S554. ..

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch 38d (step S554), and if there is no input (step S554; N), the process proceeds to step S558. If there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch 38d (step S554; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 2 for managing the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step S555), and the abnormal discharge counter 1 is It is determined whether it is 0 (step S556).

When the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S556; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform the process when the abnormality occurs. In the processing when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal discharge error flag is prepared (step S565), the abnormal discharge occurrence command is prepared (step S566), and the process proceeds to step S572. That is, in this case, although the abnormal discharge counter 1 that manages the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is 0, the input is input to the probability variation operation area switch 38d that detects the game balls flowing out from the upper flow path 38j. Since this is the case, processing is performed when an abnormality occurs.

On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge counter 1 is not 0 (step S556; N), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is updated by -1 (step S557), and it is determined whether there is an input to the passage opening switch 38g (step S558). When there is no input to the passage opening switch 38g (step S558; N), the process proceeds to step S562. If there is an input to the passage opening switch 38g (step S558; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 2 is incremented by 1 (step S559), and it is determined whether the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S560). Then, when the abnormal discharge counter 1 is 0 (step S560; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform the processing when the abnormality occurs. That is, in this case, although the abnormal discharge counter 1 that manages the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is 0, there is an input to the passage opening switch 38g that detects the game balls flowing out from the upper flow path 38j. Since this is the case, the processing when an abnormality occurs is performed.

If the abnormal discharge counter 1 is not 0 (step S560; N), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is updated by -1 (step S561), and it is determined whether the discharge confirmation switch 38e has an input (step S562). When there is no input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step S562; N), the process proceeds to step S570. When the discharge confirmation switch 38e is input (step S562; Y), it is determined whether the abnormal discharge counter 2 is 0 (step S563). Then, when the abnormal discharge counter 2 is 0 (step S563; Y), the process proceeds to step S565 to perform the process when the abnormality occurs. That is, in this case, although the abnormal discharge counter 2 that manages the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is 0, the input is made to the discharge confirmation switch 38e that detects the game balls discharged from the lower flow path 38k. Since this is the case, processing is performed when an abnormality occurs.

If the abnormal discharge counter 2 is not 0 (step S563; N), the abnormal discharge counter 2 is updated by -1 (step S564), and the process proceeds to step S570. In this case, there is no abnormality. After that, an abnormal discharge cancellation flag is prepared (step S570), an abnormal discharge cancellation command is prepared (step S571), and it is determined whether the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area matches the prepared flag (step S572).

On the other hand, if an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step S551; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the initialization switch 112 (step S567), and if there is no input (step S567; N), abnormal discharge is performed. The monitoring process ends. In this case, the state where the abnormal discharge error is occurring continues. If there is an input to the initialization switch (step S567; Y), the abnormal discharge counter 1 is cleared to 0 (step S568) and the abnormal discharge counter 2 is cleared to 0 as processing for canceling the abnormal discharge error (step S568). S569). After that, an abnormal discharge cancellation flag is prepared (step S570), an abnormal discharge cancellation command is prepared (step S571), and it is determined whether the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area matches the prepared flag (step S572).

When the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area and the prepared flag match (step S572; Y), the abnormal discharge monitoring process ends.
If the value of the abnormal discharge error flag area and the prepared flag do not match (step S572; N), the prepared flag is saved in the abnormal discharge error flag area (step S573) and effect command setting processing is performed (step S573). S574). As a result, either the abnormal discharge occurrence command or the abnormal discharge cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. The production control device 300 notifies that the abnormal discharge error is occurring in response to receiving the abnormal discharge occurrence command. Since this abnormal discharge error is an error for stopping the game, the progress of the production is also stopped, and the error notification is continued during the abnormal discharge error. In addition, the production of the game is restarted with the reception of the abnormal discharge cancellation command, and the notification that the abnormal discharge error is occurring is ended.

After that, it is determined whether the new flag is the abnormal discharge cancellation flag (step S574), and if it is not the abnormal discharge cancellation flag (step S574; N), the abnormal discharge monitoring process ends.
If it is the abnormal discharge cancellation flag (step S574; Y), that is, if the abnormal discharge error is canceled based on the operation of the initialization switch 112, it is determined whether a customer waiting demonstration is in progress (step S576). .. If the customer waiting demonstration is not in progress (step S576; N), the abnormal discharge monitoring process ends.
When the customer waiting demo is being performed (step S576; Y), a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step S577), effect command setting processing is performed (step S578), and the abnormal discharge monitoring processing is ended. The game is restarted with the cancellation of the error occurrence error, but when the customer waiting demo state is resumed at the time of restart, the command is not transmitted to the effect control device 300 in other processing, so the effect control device 300 is here. By sending the customer waiting demo command to, the production in the customer waiting demo state is started.

[Unauthorized magnet monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S114) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start or end of the fraud notification is set.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal. It is determined whether magnetism is detected (step S601).
When the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, when an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (step S602), and the timer is updated. Determines whether the time has expired (step S603). In the case of the present embodiment, it is determined that the time has expired when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 ms or more.

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet irregularity notification timer area (step S605). Then, a command for magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. Yes (step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period of time (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud that defines the magnet fraud notification time is defined. If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). The minimum value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is "0" (step S610). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step S603; N), the process proceeds to step S609.

If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not "0" (step S610; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. Further, when the value of the magnet injustice notification timer is “0” (step S610; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and the injustice notification period has expired or the injustice has been incorrect from the beginning. If the notification has not been made, a command for ending the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud cancellation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613).

If the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the prepared magnet illegal flag does not match the value of the magnet illegal flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet illegal flag is saved in the magnet illegal flag area (step S614), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. Here, “step S601; N” → “step S608” → “step S609” → “step S610; Y” → “step S611” → “step S612” → “step S613; Y” is a normal route.

[Board radio frequency monitoring process]
Next, details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S115) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the start or end of the fraud notification is set.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I/F 121, It is determined whether the board radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, a state in which an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701).
When the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

Then, a board radio wave irregularity notification command is prepared (step S703), a board radio wave irregularity flag is prepared as a board radio wave irregularity flag (step S704), and the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag is set to a value in the board radio wave irregularity flag area. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times, whereas in the case of board radio fraud, the board radio sensor 62 is turned on once. At that time, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the board radio sensor 62 is not turned on (step S701; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio fraud notification timer that regulates the radio fraud notification time is "0" unless it is -1. Update (step S705). In addition, the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step S706).

If the value of the radio wave injustice notification timer is not "0" (step S706; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the board radio wave injustice monitoring process ends. In addition, when the value of the radio wave injustice notification timer is “0” (step S706; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and the injustice notification period has ended or is incorrect from the beginning. If the notification is not made, a command to end the board radio wave irregularity notification is prepared (step S707), and a board radio wave irregularity release flag is prepared as a board radio wave irregularity flag (step S708). It is determined whether or not the value matches the value in the board radio wave irregularity flag area (step S709).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag matches the value of the board radio wave irregularity flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave irregularity monitoring processing is ended. If the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag does not match the value of the board radio wave irregularity flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag is saved in the board radio wave irregularity flag area (step S710), and the effect command is issued. The setting process is performed (step S711), and the board radio wave irregularity monitoring process is ended. Here, "step S701; N" -> "step S705" -> "step S706; Y" -> "step S707" -> "step S708" -> "step S709; Y" is a normal route.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S116) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results of each process, the information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement center internal management device or a test shooting test device is created and set in an output buffer. ..

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, in the external information editing process, it is first determined whether or not a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of a switch connector is occurring (step S751). In step S751; N), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S752), and the process proceeds to step S754. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step S751; Y), ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S753), and the process proceeds to step S754.

If the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step S754; N) and the body frame opening error is not occurring (step S755; N), the OFF data of the door/frame opening signal is set in the external information output data area. The data is saved (step S756), the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S757), and the process proceeds to step S760.
On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S754; Y) or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S755; Y), the ON data of the door/frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S758), the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S759), and the process proceeds to step S760.

If the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", it is updated by -1 ( Step S760). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the RAM is started by clearing the RAM in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S761).

When the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S761; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S762), and step S763. Process shifts to.
If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S761; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the process of step S762 is skipped and the process of step S763 is performed. Transition.

Then, as shown in FIG. 85, an abnormal discharge error, a magnet error, a board radio wave error, a remaining ball error, an ejected ball error, a V abnormal passage error, an upper special prize opening illegality, a lower large prize opening illegality, a denial illegality and vibration. When at least one of the injustices is occurring (at least one of steps S763 to S772 is Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S773), and the ON data of the security signal is saved. Is saved in the external information output data area (step S776), and the process proceeds to step S777. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, abnormal discharge error, magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, residual ball error, ejected ball error, V abnormal passage error, upper special winning opening fraud, lower large winning entry fraud, universal denial fraud and vibration fraud If not (all of steps S763 to S772 are N), the process proceeds to step S774. If the frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring (step S774; N) and there is no probability variation operating area abnormal passage information (step S775; N), the process proceeds to step S777. If frame radio wave irregularity is occurring (step S774; Y) or there is probability variation operation area abnormal passage information (step S775; Y), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S776). ), and proceeds to step S777. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

Then, the main prize ball signal editing process (step S777) for setting the information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal editing process (step S778) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed.
Next, if the symbol fixed number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not "0", -1 is updated (step S779). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is "0" (step S780).

If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S780; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the OFF data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S781), the external information editing process ends.
If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S780; N), that is, if the time is not up, the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S781), and the external information editing process ends.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S777) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. In the main prize ball signal editing process, the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning the prize hole reaches a predetermined number (10 in the case of the present embodiment) This is the process of outputting to the device.

As shown in FIG. 86, in the main award ball signal editing process, first, if the main award ball signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal output times is "0" (step S833).

When the number of times of outputting the main prize ball signal is not "0" (step S833; N), the number of times of outputting the main prize ball signal is updated by -1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is displayed in the main prize ball. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S835). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is between the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 msec) and the OFF state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 msec) of the main prize ball signal. Of the ON state (for example, 128 msec). After that, ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.
If the number of times of outputting the main prize ball signal is “0” (step S833; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0" (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0". If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S836; Y), the process shifts to step S837. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step S836; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the planned number of payout game balls reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 sets the payout number of game balls to 10. The main prize ball signal is output every time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the main prize ball number signal output count by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) and updates every 10 payout schedules (each time a payout command is transmitted). The main prize ball signal is output for the set number of outputs.
With respect to the main award ball signal output for each schedule, since the award ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 coins are actually paid out, the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to deal with illegal payouts. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, even if the payout is delayed due to running out of balls, etc., and if the payout is made after the big hit ends, the hall computer (hall computer) will be Information can be collected (judged).

[Starting gate signal editing process]
Next, details of the starting opening signal editing process (step S778) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described. The starting port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 87, in the starting opening signal editing process, first, if the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S841). The minimum value of the starting port signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting port signal output control timer is "0" (step S842). When the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output frequency is "0" (step S843).

Then, if the number of times of starting port signal output is not "0" (step S843; N), the number of times of starting port signal output is updated by -1 (step S844), and the starting port signal output control timer is set in the starting port signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The initial value of the starting port signal output control timer is calculated from the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 msec) and the OFF state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 msec) of the starting port signal. It is an on-state time (for example, 128 msec). After that, ON data for turning on the starting opening signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the starting opening signal editing process is ended.
If the number of times the starting port signal is output is "0" (step S843; Y), the OFF data for turning off the starting port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S843). (S848), and the starting port signal editing process ends.

On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0" (step S842; N), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S846). The fact that the start-port signal output control timer is in the output-on section means that the value of the start-port signal output control timer is not "0". If the start-port signal output control timer is in the output-on section (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the start-port signal output control timer is not in the output-on section (step S846; N), off data for turning off the start-port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( (Step S848), the starting opening signal editing process is terminated.

《Renso Notification》
Next, the condominium notification effect in this embodiment will be described.
This holiday inn notice effect is performed, for example, by changing the display mode of the decorative special diagram starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory of the notification target in the decorative special diagram starting memory display unit 42 to the holiday informing mode. It is a production.

As shown in FIG. 2, for example, the decoration special figure starting memory display unit 42 of the present embodiment is provided on the lower left side and the lower right side of the display device 41. The four LEDs are arranged side by side, and the decoration special drawing start memory display section 42 on the right side is also arranged by four LEDs. Then, these eight LEDs are, in order from the left, the starting memory of the first digestion sequence→the second starting memory of the digestion sequence→the third starting memory of the digestion sequence→the fourth starting memory of the digestion sequence→the fifth startup sequence of the digestion sequence. It corresponds to the memory→the 6th starting memory of the digestion order→the 7th starting memory of the digestion order→the 8th starting memory of the digestion order. That is, the leftmost LED of the left decoration special map start memory display unit 42 is the decoration special map start memory display corresponding to the start memory having the first digestion order, and the right LED special character start memory display unit 42 of the right decoration special map start memory display unit 42. The LED on the far right is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the eighth digestion order.

88(a) and 88(b) show an example of the condominium notice effect.
In the present embodiment, the determination result in the low probability state is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the processes of steps A158 and A159 of the special figure reservation information determination process (FIG. 33), and the effect control is performed by the processes of steps A168 and A169. The determination result in the high probability state is transmitted to the device 300.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state after the special game state ends based on the fact that the V prize has been won (the probability variation operation area switch 38d has detected the game ball). It is supposed to be.

Therefore, regarding the starting memory (hereinafter referred to as “high probability hit hold”) in which the determination result in the low probability state is “out” and the determination result in the high probability state is “big hit”, a special feature based on the starting memory is used. When the probability state at the time of executing the figure variation display game is the low probability state, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory is out of alignment. Therefore, before the probability state after the end of the special game state is determined to be the high-probability state or the low-probability state, the decoration special map starting memory display corresponding to the high-probability per-hold is retained (hereinafter, "high-probability per-hold If the display mode of "display") is changed to the condominium informing mode, a so-called gaze effect may be performed, and the condominium informing effect may be an unreliable effect.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88A, for example, when the V winning is successful (that is, when the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is determined to be the high probability state), the high The display mode of the per-probability hold display is changed from the normal display mode (here, polka dot pattern) to the condominium notice mode (here, lattice pattern). As a result, it is possible to perform a highly reliable condominium notification effect. In the example shown in FIG. 88(a), after the success of the V winning, the display mode of one high-probability-per-hold display is changed to the condominium notification mode, thereby informing the "2 condominiums". Is running.
Here, the case where the V winning is successful means that the probability state after the end of the special game state becomes the high probability state because the probability variation operating area switch 38d has been input when the probability variation operating area 38h is valid. Is. Further, when the V winning is unsuccessful, there is no input to the probability variation operating area switch 38d when the probability variation operating area 38h is valid, so that the probability state after the special game state ends is a low probability state. is there.

On the other hand, regarding a starting memory (hereinafter referred to as “low probability hit hold”) in which the determination result in the low probability state is “big hit” and the determination result in the high probability state is “big hit”, Regardless of whether the probability state at the time of executing the figure variation display game is the high probability state or the low probability state, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory is a big hit. Therefore, before the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is determined to be the high probability state or the low probability state, the decoration special map starting memory display corresponding to the low probability hold (hereinafter referred to as "low probability hold" Even if the display mode of "display") is changed to the condominium notification mode, the gaze effect is not produced. Therefore, the timing of changing the display mode of the low probability per pending display to the condominium informing mode (display mode change timing) is arbitrary, but in the present embodiment, in accordance with the display mode change timing of the high probability per pending display, When the V winning is successful (that is, when the probability state after the special game state is determined to be the high probability state), the display mode of the low probability per pending display is changed to the condominium notification mode. ..

An example of the display mode change timing of the high probability per hold display is shown in FIG. 88(b).
In the “(1) High probability per pending” shown in FIG. 88(b), the display mode of the high probability per pending display is changed to the condominium notification mode immediately after the successful V winning (t101). In this case, since it is possible to perform the condominium notice information effect at substantially the same time as the V prize notice effect for notifying that the V prize has been successful, it is possible to perform mutually related effects as the condominium notice effect and the V prize notice effect. Becomes Specifically, when there is a hit hold (high probability hit hold, low probability hit hold) of the notification object in the undigested starting memory (that is, when the condominium news notification effect is performed), the V winning notification effect When the effect mode is set to the first effect mode and there is no hit hold of the notification target in the undigested start memory (that is, when the condominium notification effect is not performed), the effect mode of the V winning notification effect is set. When the second presentation mode is set and the presentation mode of the V winning notification production is the first production mode, the display mode of the high-probability-per-hold display (or the low-probability-per-hold display) of the notification target changes from the normal display mode to the condominium notification. It is possible to perform effects related to each other, such as changing the mode.

Further, in the "(2) High Probability Per Hold" shown in FIG. 88(b), the V winning is successful (t101), and then a predetermined round (FIG. 88(b) after the specific round (lever solenoid operation round)). In the example shown in (), when the second round) is started (t102), the display mode of the high probability per pending display is changed to the condominium notification mode. In this case, since the extended-game notification effect does not conflict with the V-prize notification effect, it is possible to perform a reliable notification.
Further, in the "(3) High probability per pending" shown in FIG. 88(b), when the V winning is successful (t101) and then the ending effect is started (t103), the display mode of the high probability per pending display continues. It has been changed to a villa notification mode. In this case, since the extended-game notification effect does not conflict with the V-prize notification effect, it is possible to perform a reliable notification.

Next, the timing of returning the display mode of the high probability per hold display to the normal display mode (display mode return timing) will be described.
In the example shown in FIG. 89(a), after the success of the V winning, the display mode of the two high-probability-per-hold displays is changed to the condominium notification mode, thereby informing the "3 condominiums". Is running. In such a case, that is, by changing the display mode of the two or more high-probability-per-hold displays to the condominium notification mode after the successful V winning, the condominium notification effect for notifying "three or more consorts" is executed. In that case, if the display mode of the high-probability-per-holding display is the condominium notification mode even after the V winning has failed in the special game state that occurs after that, there is a possibility that the gaze effect may be performed. , There is a possibility that the performance information of the condominium is unreliable.
Therefore, in this embodiment, until the V winning fails (while the V winning continues to be successful), the display mode of the high probability per pending display continues to be the condominium informing mode, while the V winning is won. In the case of failure, the display mode of the high-probability-per-hold display is returned to the normal display mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 89(a). As a result, it is possible to perform a highly reliable condominium notification effect.

FIG. 89(b) shows an example of the display mode return timing of the hold display per high probability.
In "(1) Suspend per high probability" shown in FIG. 89(b), V winning has failed, and then a predetermined round (in the example shown in FIG. 89(b)) after a specific round (lever solenoid operation round). When the second round) is started (t111), the display mode of the high probability per pending display is returned to the normal display mode.
Further, in the "(2) High probability per hold" shown in FIG. 89(b), when the V winning fails and the ending effect is started (t112), the display mode of the high probability per hold display becomes the normal display mode. I'm back.

The control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 will be described, including the processing for enabling the effect as described above. The main control microcomputer 311 performs a main process shown in FIG. 90 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 90, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing.
In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8).
Next, effect button input processing (step C9) of creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The reading of the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, when the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is made, the process of changing the effect content is performed.

Then, a hall/player setting mode process is performed for setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LEDs and the like, and accepting a change operation of the brightness and volume of the LEDs and the like by the player (step C10).
Next, a random number update process (step C11) of updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) that analyzes and responds to the command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) that performs settings for controlling the progress of the effect and edits of drawing commands. ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, since the system cycle (1 frame 1/30 second) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 second) is entered twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate, and for example, the image may be updated (frame switching) at 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frame switching at a timing later than 1/60 seconds). May be switched).
When it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b) and a decoration control process (step for controlling LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, etc.). C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed. Then, the initial operation process for setting the initial operation of the movable effect device is performed (step C20), and the process returns to the process for clearing WDT (step C8).

[Reception command check processing]
FIG. 91 shows the received command check processing (step C12) in the main processing described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception number (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is 0 (step C202).
Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is ended. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether the copying of the command for the number of received commands is completed. The determination is made (step C206). As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. It is configured as follows. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to make a vacant space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, the command analysis can be collectively performed in one round of the main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207) and the received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210).
Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. As described above, in the received command check processing, the commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are analyzed together. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Reception command analysis processing]
FIG. 92 shows the received command analysis process (step C208) in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233).
When MODE and ACT are determined to be in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

When it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232;N, step C233;N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the received command analysis processing is ended.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the variable system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a special figure. When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235; Y), the variable system command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of variable system commands (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of big hit system commands (step C237). The big hit type command is a command or the like for instructing an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C237; Y), the big hit system command process (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information relating to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special symbol). Then, when MODE is determined to be in the range of the symbol type command (step C239; Y), the symbol type command process (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-based commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot system commands such as the hold number command and error command (step C239). C241). The single-shot system command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense by combination like a pattern command and a variable system command. This single-shot system command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information system command, an error/illegal system command, and a model designation command. When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the single-shot system command (step C241; Y), the single-shot system command process (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch symbol commands (step C243). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the prefetching symbol system command (step C243; Y), the prefetching symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetching symbol type command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable type command (step C245). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable system command (step C245; Y), the prefetching variable system command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation type command (step C245; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

The look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary to execute the look-ahead effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as the pre-reading notice or the pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variability display game corresponding to the starting memory (holding) in which the special figure variability display game is not executed is a big hit when it is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of variation pattern) with a predetermined degree of reliability, the decoration special figure starting memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a manner different from the normal mode, or the display device 41. It is an effect such as performing an effect display. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading variation system command and pre-reading pattern system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which correspond to the starting memory which is the object of pre-reading production, from game control control equipment 100 at the time of starting winning a prize It is transmitted to the performance control device 300. Note that normal variable-type commands and symbol-type commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

[Big hit type command processing]
FIG. 93 shows the big hit system command processing (step C238) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this big hit system command processing, it is first determined whether MODE is fanfare (step C411). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern).
If MODE is fanfare (step C411; Y), fanfare production setting processing for setting fanfare production corresponding to the fanfare command is performed (step C414), and the P machine state is set to fanfare (step C415). ), the big hit system command processing ends.

If MODE is not a fanfare (step C411; N), it is determined whether MODE is a round (step C416). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state.
If MODE is a round (step C416; Y), a process for canceling the condominium notice effect for setting the end of the condominium notice effect is performed (step C412), and the round effect setting for updating the number-of-rounds display information is performed. Processing is performed (step C417), the P machine state is set to "round" (step C418), and the big hit system command processing ends.

If MODE is not a round (step C416; N), it is determined whether MODE is an interval (step C419). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to an interval between rounds.
Then, if MODE is an interval (step C419; Y), an interval effect setting process for setting effects during the interval is performed (step C420), the P machine state is set during the interval (step C421), and the big hit is made. Terminates command processing.

If MODE is not an interval (step C419; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C422). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to the ending after the final round.
When MODE is the ending (step C422; Y), for example, when the high probability state is set after the end of the special game state, the screen information for notifying that the high probability state is set is set. If the ending effect setting process for setting the screen information corresponding to the game state after the big hit is done (step C423), the P machine state is set to the ending state (step C424), and if the V winning flag is set. , The V winning flag is cleared (step C413), and the big hit system command processing ends.

When the MODE is not the ending (step C422; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a V winning (step C425). That is, it is determined whether the received command is the probability variation operating area passing command (see step A223).
When the MODE is V winning (step C425; Y), the V winning flag is set (step C426), and V winning notification effect setting processing for setting V winning notification effect is performed (step C427). The condominium notice effect setting process for setting the villa notice effect is performed (step C428), and the big hit system command process ends.
If MODE is not a V prize (step C425; N), the big hit system command processing is ended.

[Conditioner notice production setting process]
In FIG. 94(a), the condominium notice effect setting process (step C428) in the above-described big hit system command process is shown. In this condominium informing effect setting process, first, the undecided hit hold (high probability hit hold, low probability hit hold) and the corresponding decoration special figure start memory display display mode is set to the normal display mode. Notification target lottery processing for determining whether or not to make a notification target (a target of the condominium notification effect) is performed for each of the hit suspensions (step C441). In addition, the notification target lottery process is not performed in the condominium notice production setting process, but before the condominium notice production setting process (for example, at the start of the lever solenoid operation round or at the start of the special game state). You can go.
Then, when there is no hold that has been won in the notification target lottery process (step C442; N), that is, when there is no start memory of the notification target, the condominium notification performance setting process ends.

On the other hand, if there is a hold held in the notification target lottery process (step C442; Y), that is, if there is a start memory of the notification target, a decorative special figure start memory display (notification target reserved display) corresponding to the start memory. The display mode of (1) is set to the notification form of the continuous holidays (step C443), and the notification process of the continuous holidays effect setting process ends. As a result, as shown in “(1) Suspend per high probability” shown in FIG. 88(b), the display mode of the high-probability-per-hold display of the notification target is changed to the condominium notification mode immediately after the V winning is successful. .. Further, the display mode of the low-probability-per-provision display for the notification target also changes to the condominium notification mode.

Note that, for example, immediately before or immediately after the round effect setting process (step C417) for a predetermined round after the lever solenoid operation round, it is determined whether the V winning flag is set, and the V winning flag is set. If it is determined that the condominium notification effect production setting process (step C428) is performed, the V winning is successful, as shown in “(2) Hold per high probability” shown in FIG. When the round starts, the display mode of the notification target high probability per display (and the notification target low probability per display) can be changed to the condominium notification mode.

Further, for example, immediately before or after the ending effect setting process (step C423) (at least before the process of clearing the V winning flag (step C413)), it is determined whether the V winning flag is set, and the V winning flag is set. When it is determined that is set, by performing the condominium notice effect setting process (step C428), the V winning is successful, as shown in “(3) Hold per high probability” shown in FIG. 88(b). After that, when the ending effect is started, the display mode of the notification target high-probability-per-hold display (and the notification target low-probability-per-hold display) can be changed to the condominium notification mode.

In addition, for example, immediately before or after the interval effect setting process (step C420) for setting the interval effect executed after the lever solenoid operation round, or a round effect setting process for a predetermined round after the lever solenoid operation round (step). It is determined whether the V winning flag is set immediately before or after C417), immediately before or after the ending effect setting process (step C423) (at least before the process of clearing the V winning flag (step C413)), or the like. However, when it is determined that the V winning flag is not set, it is possible to perform a process of setting the display mode of the low probability per pending display of the notification target to the condominium notification mode. With this configuration, even if the V winning is unsuccessful, the display mode of the low probability per pending display can be changed to the condominium notification mode.

[Conditioner notice production cancellation processing]
In FIG. 94(b), the condominium information notifying effect canceling process (step C412) in the above-described big hit system command process is shown. In this holiday game notification effect canceling process, first, based on a round command (see step A854) from the game control device 100, it is determined whether or not the current round is a predetermined round after the lever solenoid operation round ( Step C451).
When it is determined in step C451 that the current round is not the predetermined round (step C451; N), the condominium notice processing effect cancellation process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step C451 that the current round is the predetermined round (step C451; Y), it is determined whether the V winning flag is set (step C452). As shown in FIG. 93, in the present embodiment, the V winning flag is set before the ending effect is started and cleared at the start of the ending effect. Therefore, if the V winning flag is set, it is understood that the probability state after the end of the special game state that is currently occurring becomes a high probability state, and if the V winning flag is not set, it is currently occurring. It can be seen that the probability state after the end of the special game state is the low probability state.
If it is determined in step C452 that the V winning flag is set (step C452; Y), that is, if the probability state after the end of the special game state that is currently occurring becomes the high probability state, the high probability is set. Since it is not necessary to return the display mode of the hit hold display to the normal display mode, the consecutive-game notification effect canceling process ends.

On the other hand, in step C452, when it is determined that the V winning flag is not set (step C452; N), that is, when the probability state after the end of the special game state that is currently occurring is the low probability state, It is determined whether there is a high-probability-per-hold display for which the display mode is set to the condominium notification mode (step C453).
If it is determined in step C453 that there is no high-probability-per-hold display that is set in the extended-compartment notification mode (step C453; N), the extended-compartment notification effect canceling process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C453 that there is a high-probability-per-hold display that is set to the extended-compartment notification mode (step C453; Y), the display mode of the high-probability-per-hold display is normally displayed. The mode is set (step C454), and the condominium information notification canceling process ends. As a result, as shown in “(1) Suspend per high probability” shown in FIG. 89(b), when the V winning fails and the predetermined round after the lever solenoid operation round starts, the high probability per winning is started. The display mode of the hold display returns to the normal display mode. On the other hand, when there is a low-probability-per-hold display that is set as the extended-progress notification mode, the display mode of the low-probability-per-retention display remains the condominium notice mode even if the V winning has failed. It does not return to the normal display mode.
That is, in the extended-compartment notification effect canceling process (the extended-compartment notification effect cancel process shown in FIG. 94(b)) of the present embodiment, the extended-compartment notification effect in which the display mode of the high probability per pending display is changed to the extended-compartment notification mode is canceled. However, the condominium notice effect that changes the display mode of the low-probability-per-hold display to the condominium notice mode is not cancelled.

If the V winning is unsuccessful, the display mode of the low probability per pending display may be configured to cancel the condominium notification effect.
Further, for example, immediately before or after the ending effect setting process (step C423) (at least before the process of clearing the V winning flag (step C413)), it is determined whether the V winning flag is set, and the V winning flag is set. When it is determined that is not set, it is determined whether or not there is a high-probability-per-hold hold display in which the display mode is set to the condominium informing mode, and the display mode is set to the high-probability-per-hold mode in which the display mode is set to the condominium informing mode. When it is determined that there is a display, a process (step C454) of setting the display mode of the high-probability-per-holding display to the normal display mode is performed, whereby "(2) High-probability-per-holding" shown in FIG. 89B is performed. As described above, when the V winning is failed and the ending effect is started thereafter, the display mode of the high probability per pending display can be returned to the normal display mode.

Further, as shown in, for example, FIGS. 95(a) and 95(b), it is possible to perform a suggestion effect that suggests that the condominium notice effect is executed if the V winning is successful. In the example shown in FIGS. 95(a) and 95(b), when the lever solenoid operation round is started (t121), the display mode of the high-probability per-hold display of the notification target is changed from the normal display mode (here, a polka dot pattern) to a suggestion mode ( Here, it changes to a diagonal stripe pattern), and immediately after the V winning is successful (t122), the display mode changes from the suggestion mode to the condominium notification mode (here, a grid pattern).
The timing of changing the display mode to the suggestion mode is not limited to the start time of the lever solenoid operation round, and can be changed as appropriate before the start time of the lever solenoid operation round.

In the case of performing the suggestion effect, specifically, the effect control device 300 first, for example, the undigested starting memory (holding per high probability, holding per low probability, holding out of margin (the determination result in the low probability state is also high probability). The suggestion target lottery for deciding whether or not to make the suggestion target (the target of the suggestion effect) is performed for each of the starting memories) in which the determination result in the state is also “off”. In addition, for each of the unsuccessful hit holdings (holding for high probability and holding for low probability), notification target lottery processing is performed to determine whether or not to make the notification target (target of the condominium notification performance).
Then, the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory of the suggestion target is changed from the normal display mode to the suggesting mode at a predetermined first timing.

Further, when the starting memory in which the display mode is changed from the normal displaying mode to the suggesting mode is the informing target starting memory and the V winning is successful, the decoration feature corresponding to the starting memory is further added. The display mode of the figure starting memory display is changed from the suggestion mode to the condominium notice mode.
Further, when the starting memory in which the display mode is changed from the normal display mode to the suggesting mode is not the informing target starting memory, the starting memory is supported even after it is determined whether the V winning is successful or unsuccessful. After it is determined whether the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is the suggestive mode or whether the V winning is successful or unsuccessful, the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory is displayed. The display mode is returned from the suggestion mode to the normal display mode.

Then, when the V winning is unsuccessful in the state where the display mode of the high probability per pending display is the condominium informing mode, at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of a predetermined round after the lever solenoid operation round (t131). )), the high-probability-per-hold display mode is cancelled. At this time, for example, the display mode may be returned to the suggestion mode as shown by the solid line in FIG. 95(c), or the display mode may be changed to the normal display mode as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 95(c). You may bring it back.

The display device 41 may be configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). With this configuration, when the V winning is successful, for example, as shown in FIG. 96(a), an effect of displaying the character image "V" on the display device 41 as the V winning notification effect can be performed. it can. Further, it is possible to perform an effect related to the prize notification effect as the condominium notification effect.
Specifically, for example, when there is one notification hold (holding per high probability, holding per low probability) in the undigested starting memory, the V winning notification effect (for example, FIG. 96(a)). ), the character image "V" is moved toward the corresponding decorative special figure starting memory display while being reduced, as shown in FIG. 96(c), and then, for example, as shown in FIG. 96(d). In addition, as the consecutive-village notification effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the corresponding decorative special figure starting memory display from the normal display mode (here, polka dot pattern) to the condominium notification mode (here, lattice pattern) can be performed. it can.

Further, for example, if there are two notification target hits held (high probability hit hold, low probability hit hold) in the undigested starting memory, after the V winning notification effect (for example, FIG. 96(a)). For example, as shown in FIG. 96(e), two character images “V” are displayed, and each character image is reduced and moved toward the corresponding decorative special figure starting memory display, and then, for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 96(g), as the continuous-village notification effect, it is possible to perform an effect such as changing the display mode of the corresponding decorative special figure starting memory display from the normal display mode to the continuous-villa notification mode. Alternatively, after the V winning notification effect (for example, FIG. 96(a)), for example, as shown in FIG. 96(f), a divided image obtained by dividing the character image “V” into two is displayed, and each divided image is displayed. Is moved toward the corresponding decorative special figure starting memory display while being reduced, and then, as a holiday resort notification effect, the display mode of the corresponding decorative special figure starting memory display is displayed as shown in FIG. 96(g), for example. It is possible to perform an effect such as changing from the normal display mode to the condominium notification mode.
On the other hand, when there is no hit hold of the notification object in the undigested start memory (when there is no hit hold in the undigested start memory, or when there is a hit hold in the undigested start memory, the hit hold Is not the notification target), after the V winning notification effect (for example, FIG. 96(a)), as shown in FIG. 96(b), for example, as shown in FIG. It does not change.

Further, when the display device 41 is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube), for example, the decoration special figure start memory display section 42 is used as a condominium notification effect. Instead of (or in addition to), the condominium notice effect using the display device 41 may be performed.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a special game that gives a game value to a player when the result of a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays a plurality of identification information is a special result. In a gaming machine that generates a state, in a special game state, a game ball can be converted into a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won, and a specific region into which a game ball can flow (probability change operation region) 38h) special variation winning device (first special variation winning device 38), a probability state that a special result occurs, a normal probability state (low probability state), a high probability state higher than the normal probability state, With the probability control means (game control device 100) set to any of the above, the right to execute the variable display game can be stored as a start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number, and whether or not a special result is obtained for each start memory. A starting display means (game control device 100) that extracts and stores a random number for determining whether or not a random number corresponding to the starting storage stored in the starting storage means is used to execute a variable display game based on the starting storage. It is provided with a pre-judgment means (game control device 100) that makes a decision before it is played, and an effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls execution of effects related to the variable display game. Then, the probability control means sets the probability state after the end of the special game state to the normal probability state, when the game ball won in the special variation winning device does not flow into the specific area during the occurrence of the special game state. At the same time, when a game ball that has won the special variation winning device flows into the specific area during the occurrence of the special game state, the probability state after the end of the special game state is set to the high probability state, and the production control means is , Based on the judgment result of the pre-judgment means, during the occurrence of the special game state, it is possible to execute the continuous jackpot notification effect (the condominium notification effect) that notifies that the result of the variable display game based on the starting memory will be the special result. If there is a starting memory (high probability hit hold) determined to be a special result by the pre-determination means, a continuous big hit notification effect for the starting memory (in the present embodiment, a display mode of the high probability hit hold display) Is performed after the game balls that have won the special variation winning device flow into the specific area (see, for example, FIG. 88).

Therefore, after the probability state after the end of the special game state is determined to be a high probability state, a continuous jackpot notification effect (renjo notification effect) for the starting memory (high probability hit hold) determined to be a special result Since it is executed, it is possible to execute a highly reliable continuous big hit production.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the pre-determination means (game control device 100) corresponds to the normal probability state when determining whether or not the result of the variable display game based on the starting memory is the special result. It is configured to perform the determination based on the determination value and the determination based on the determination value corresponding to the high-probability state, and the production control unit (production control device 300) is configured to perform a special determination by the pre-determination unit in the high-probability state. If there is a starting memory (high probability hit hold) that is determined to be a result, a continuous big hit notification effect for the starting memory (in the case of the present embodiment, the display mode of the high probability hit hold display is changed to the condominium notification mode) ) Can be configured to be executed after the game balls that have won the special variation winning device flow into the specific area.

By configuring in this way, after the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is determined to be a high probability state, the starting memory determined to have a special result in the high probability state (holding per high probability) Since it is possible to execute the continuous big hit notification effect (continuous holiday notification effect), a highly reliable continuous big hit effect can be executed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) causes the game balls that have won the special variation winning device (first special variation winning device 38) to fall within the specific area (probability change operation area 38h). When an inflow is made, an inflow notification effect (V winning notification effect) for notifying the inflow can be executed, and the effect mode of the inflow notification effect is changed from the normal effect mode (see, for example, FIG. 96(a)) to a specific effect mode (for example, 96(c), (e), and (f) (see FIG. 96), it is possible to suggest the execution of the continuous big hit notification effect (the condominium notification effect).

With such a configuration, it is possible to effectively improve the feeling of expectation that the continuous big hit notification effect (long-range vacation notification effect) will be executed.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is determined by the pre-determination means (game control device 100) to have a special result in the high probability state (start probability) (high probability). In the special game state after the special game state that has occurred at the start of the execution of the continuous big hit notification production, the special variation winning device (first special variation) It can be configured to cancel when the game ball that has won the winning device 38) does not flow into the specific region (probability change operating region 38h) (see, for example, FIG. 89).

With such a configuration, when it is determined that the probability state after the end of the special game state is not the high-probability state during execution of the continuous big hit notification effect (long-spot notification effect), the continuous big hit notification effect Since the execution is ended, it is possible to execute a highly reliable continuous big hit effect.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is based on the start memory during the occurrence of the special game state, based on the determination result of the advance determination means (game control device 100). It is possible to execute a continuous jackpot suggestion effect (indication effect) that suggests that the result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) may be a special result, and the special variable winning device (first special variable winning device) 38) Regarding the starting memory (high probability per hold) which is determined by the pre-determination means to have a special result in the high probability state based on the fact that the game ball that has won the prize has flown into the specific area (probability change operation area 38h). It is possible to change the continuous big hit suggestion effect of (1) to a continuous big hit notification effect (starter notification effect) for the starting memory (see, for example, FIG. 95).

With such a configuration, it is possible to effectively improve the feeling of expectation that the continuous big hit notification effect (long-slot notification effect) will be executed.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a distribution device that distributes the game balls won in the special variation winning device (first special variation winning device 38) to a specific region (probability change operating region 38h) or a non-specific region. It may be one. In this case, in particular, the interest can be enhanced by executing the continuous jackpot suggestion effect (indication effect).

In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a special game state in which a player is provided with a game value when the result of a variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which a plurality of pieces of identification information is variably displayed is a special result. In the gaming machine that generates a special game state, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and a specific region into which the game ball can flow (probability change operation region 38h). ) The first special variation winning device 38, a second special variation winning device 39 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win in the special game state and an open state in which the game ball can win, and a special result The probability control means (game control device 100) for setting the probability state in which the probability state occurs to one of the normal probability state (low probability state) and the high probability state higher than the normal probability state, and the variable display game. The right to execute can be stored as a start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a start storage means (game control device 100 that extracts and stores a random number for determining whether or not a special result is obtained for each start memory. ) And a random number corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means before the variable display game based on the start memory is executed (game control device 100), and the variable display game. And an effect control unit (effect control device 300) that controls execution of an effect related to. Then, the probability control means, if the game ball won in the first special variation winning device 38 does not flow into the specific region during the occurrence of the special game state, the probability state after the end of the special game state is the normal probability. In addition to setting the state, when the game ball that has won the first special variation winning device 38 flows into the specific area during the occurrence of the special game state, the probability state after the end of the special game state is set to the high probability state. However, the effect control means, based on the determination result of the pre-determination means, during the occurrence of the special game state, the continuous big hit notification effect (resort game) that informs that the result of the variable display game based on the starting memory is the special result. If there is a starting memory (high probability hit hold) that is determined to be a special result by the pre-determination means, the continuous big hit notification effect (in the case of the present embodiment, high probability) can be executed. After the game balls that have won the first special variation winning device 38 flow into the specific area, the second special variation winning device 39 executes It is configured to start during the period (round) for conversion into the closed state and the open state (see, for example, “(2) High probability hold” in FIG. 88).

Therefore, after the probability state after the end of the special game state is determined to be a high probability state, a continuous jackpot notification effect (renjo notification effect) for the starting memory (high probability hit hold) determined to be a special result Since it is executed, it is possible to execute a highly reliable continuous big hit production.

88, "(2) High probability hit hold", at the start of the period (round) in which the second special variation winning device 39 is converted into the closed state and the open state, the consecutive-game notification effect (continuous big hit notification effect). ) Has been started, but is not limited to this, and the execution start timing of the condominium notification effect starts the period (round) in which the second special variation winning device 39 is converted into the closed state and the open state. It may be a predetermined time from the end to the end, or may be the end of a period (round) in which the second special variation winning device 39 is converted into the closed state and the open state.
Further, in “(2) High probability hit hold” of FIG. 88, of the plurality of periods (a plurality of rounds) in which the second special variation winning device 39 is converted into the closed state and the open state, immediately after the lever solenoid operation round. In the round of, the execution of the condominium informing effect (continuous big hit informing effect) is started, but it is not limited to this, and in the round in which the execution of the condominium informing effect is started, the second special variation winning device 39 The period (round) for conversion into the closed state and the open state, which is a round after the lever solenoid operation round, can be appropriately changed.
Further, when the final round is the lever solenoid operation round, as shown in “(3) High probability hit hold” in FIG. 88, during ending (“(3) High probability hit hold” in FIG. 88, At the time of starting the ending effect), the execution of the condominium notification effect (continuous big hit notification effect) may be started.

《Variation pattern》
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, from the viewpoint of improving time efficiency, in order to shorten the period of the high probability state (the period in which the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state), during the period of the high probability state It is easy to select a variation pattern having a short variation time as the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game to be executed.
Of the fluctuation group tables in the present embodiment, examples of fluctuation group tables that can be selected in the high probability state (probability change state) are shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b).
FIG. 97(a) is a variation group table when the result is a failure. This variation group table is a variation group table that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer (updated variation group selection pointer) acquired in step A454 in the special figure information setting process.

Variation groups (variation pattern selection tables) that can be selected by this variation group table include reachless short system, N reach short system, reachless system, N reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, SP3 reach system. , The distribution rate is set for each.
The variation group (variation pattern selection table) is selected by the selected variation group table and the variation pattern random number 1 (see steps A462 to A464). The variation pattern random number 1 takes a value of 0 to 65535, and in the case of the present embodiment, for example, 40,000 values are assigned to the short system without reach. That is, the short reach variation group without reach is selected with a probability of 40,000/65536.

The variation pattern (variation pattern number) is selected by the selected variation group (variation pattern selection table) and the variation pattern random number 2 (see steps A465 to A467). In the case of the present embodiment, for example, when the reachless short variation group is selected, the variation pattern of the reachless short variation with the variation time of 2 seconds is selected, and the reachless variation group is selected. For, a variation pattern of reachless variation with a variation time of 8 seconds or a reachless variation with a variation time of 12 seconds is selected.

FIG. 97(b) is a fluctuation group table when the result is a big hit. This variation group table is a variation group table selectable by the variation group selection pointer acquired in step A452 in the special figure information setting process.
There are N reach short system, N reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, and SP3 reach system as the change groups (change pattern selection table) that can be selected by this change group table, and the distribution rate is set for each. ..

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), in the present embodiment, the period of the high probability state is more likely to be selected as the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game, as the variation pattern having the shorter variation time is more likely to be selected. The longer the variation pattern, the more difficult it is to select.
As described above, since it is easy to select a variation pattern having a short variation time as the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game executed during the period of the high probability state, for example, as shown in FIG. It is possible to shorten the period of the probability state, that is, increase the number of times the special game state occurs per unit time.

Here, in this embodiment, the fluctuation group of the Premier reach system cannot be selected by the fluctuation group table that can be selected in the high probability state, and can be selected only by the fluctuation group table (not shown) that can be selected in the low probability state. is there. That is, during the period of the high probability state, the fluctuation pattern of the premier reach fluctuation, which is the fluctuation pattern having the longest fluctuation time, is not selected.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation group of the Premier reach system cannot be selected by the fluctuation group table when the result is a failure, and can be selected only by the fluctuation group table when the result is a big hit. Therefore, in the present embodiment (also in the modification described later), it can be said that the fluctuation pattern of the premier reach fluctuation is the big hit fixed fluctuation pattern.

The variation pattern of the Premier reach variation is not limited to the variation pattern having the longest variation time, and may be a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time.
The fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time is, for example, the longest fluctuation time (105 seconds in the examples shown in FIGS. 97A and 97B) among the fluctuation times of reach fluctuations other than the premier reach fluctuation. The fluctuation pattern may have a fluctuation time longer than an intermediate time between the short fluctuation time (10 seconds in the example shown in FIGS. 97A and 97B), or among the fluctuation times of the SP reach fluctuation, An intermediate time between the longest fluctuation time (105 seconds in the examples shown in FIGS. 97(a) and (b)) and the shortest fluctuation time (30 seconds in the examples shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b)). The fluctuation pattern may have a longer fluctuation time.

<Modification 1>
When high probability states occur continuously, it is possible to reduce the number of occurrences of the special game state per unit time. This can prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.
As a method of reducing the number of occurrences of the special game state per unit time, for example, there is a method of lengthening the period of the high probability state.
As a method of lengthening the period of the high probability state, for example, a special figure variation display game (hereinafter referred to as "big hit") in which the result is a big hit not only in the period of the low probability state (normal probability state) but also in the period of the high probability state. As a variation pattern of “variation”), there is a method in which a variation pattern of the Premier reach variation can be selected.

<Modification 1-1>
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 98(a), at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the end of the special game state), the current special game state is based on a hit in a low probability. If it is, the low probability medium flag is saved, and if the current special game state is based on the hit in the high probability, the high probability medium flag is saved.
When the low probability medium flag is saved, the variation pattern of the premier reach variation cannot be selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the high probability state. On the other hand, when the high probability medium flag is saved, it is possible to select the variation pattern of the premier reach variation as the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the high probability state.

[Big hit end processing]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98(a), the game control device 100 of the present modification executes the big hit ending process shown in FIG. 99 instead of the big hit ending process shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 99, in the jackpot ending process of the present modification, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1001), and the special game state this time is a high probability and there is a time saving and a win. It is determined whether it is based on (step A1002).

When the special game state this time is not based on the high probability & hit during the time saving (step A1002; N), that is, the special game state this time is based on the low probability & hit without time saving, low. If the probability is based on the probability of winning in the probability & shortened time, if it is one of the probability of the previous hit probability state flag area, save the low probability medium flag (step A1031), is the big hit symbol V easy symbol? Is determined (step A1003).
When the big hit symbol is not the V easy symbol (step A1003; N), the information of the time saving mode B start is prepared as the production mode after the end of the special game state (step A1004), and the process proceeds to step A1006.
If the big hit symbol is a V easy symbol (step A1003; Y), information for starting the time saving mode A is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1005), and the process proceeds to step A1006.

On the other hand, if the special game state this time is based on a high probability and a hit in the presence of time saving (step A1002; Y), the high probability medium flag is saved in the previous hit probability state flag area (step A1032). ), information for starting the time saving mode A is prepared as the effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1005), and the process proceeds to step A1006.
Since the processing after step A1006 (steps A1006 to A1030) is the same as the big hit ending processing shown in FIG. 62, the description of the processing after step A1006 will be omitted.

[Special map information setting process]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98(a), the game control device 100 of the present modification executes the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 100 instead of the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. ..
As shown in FIG. 100, in the special figure information setting process of this modified example, first, the variable group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the variable group selection pointer corresponding to the probability state and the stop symbol pattern number is acquired. (Step A452). The stochastic states are low-probability and non-time saving states (low probability & no time saving), high-probability states and time saving states (high probability & time saving), low probability states and time saving (low probability & time saving). It is one of the three states. Further, the stop symbol pattern number is any of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the outlier symbol, the 12R probability variable symbol, the 5R probability variable symbol, the 5R normal symbol, the 4R probability variable symbol, and the 4R normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is the outlier symbol (step A453), and if it is the outlier symbol (step A453; Y), it corresponds to the total value of the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number. The variable group selection pointer is updated to the value (step A454), the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process ends.
In addition, if it is not a falling symbol (step A453; N), that is, if it is a big hit symbol, it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A456).

When the probability state of the special figure variation display game is not the high probability state (step A456; N), that is, the current probability state is neither the low probability state nor the shortened time state (low probability & no reduction time), the low probability state and the shortened time state. If either of the states (low probability & time saving), the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process ends.
On the other hand, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state (step A456; Y), that is, when the current probability state is the high probability state and the short time state (high probability & short time), It is determined whether the flag saved in the previous hit probability state flag area is a high probability medium flag (step A457).

When the flag saved in the previous hit probability state flag area is not the high probability medium flag (step A457; N), that is, when the flag saved in the previous hit probability state flag area is the low probability medium flag Saves the pointer in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455), and ends the special figure information setting process.
On the other hand, when the previous hit probability state flag is the high probability medium flag (step A457; Y), the variable group selection pointer is updated to the value for the condominium (step A458), and the pointer is moved to the variable group selection pointer area. Is saved (step A455), and the special figure information setting process ends.

Here, an example of the variation group table in the variation group table according to the present modification that can be selected in the high probability state (probability variation state) and the result is a big hit is shown in FIGS. 101(a) and 101(b). ..
It should be noted that, of the variation group tables in the present modification, the variation group table that can be selected in the high probability state and the result is out of order is the variation group table in the above embodiment that can be selected in the high probability state. This is the same as the variation group table (see FIG. 97(a)) when the result is a failure.

FIG. 101A is a variation group table when the low probability medium flag is saved. This variable group table is a variable group table that can be selected by the variable group selection pointer acquired in step A452 in the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. The fluctuation group table shown in FIG. 101(a) is the same as the fluctuation group table (see FIG. 97(b)) that can be selected in the high probability state and the result is a big hit, among the fluctuation group tables in the above embodiment. Is.

FIG. 101B is a variable group table when the high probability medium flag is saved. This variation group table is a variation group table that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer (updated variation group selection pointer) acquired in step A458 in the special figure information setting process shown in FIG.
The variation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by this variation group table include N reach short system, N reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, SP3 reach system, and premier reach system. It is set.

As shown in FIGS. 101(a) and 101(b), in the present modification, a variation pattern that is easy to be selected as a variation pattern of the big hit variation is during the period of the high probability state when the low probability medium flag is saved. It differs from when the high probability medium flag is saved. Specifically, when the low probability medium flag is saved, a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected as a variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the high probability state, and a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected. The pattern is harder to select. On the other hand, when the high probability medium flag is saved, the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the high probability state is less likely to be selected as the variation pattern with the shorter variation time and is selected as the variation pattern with the longer variation time. It is easy to be done.

As a result, after a high probability state period (first high probability state period) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on a hit in the low probability and after the end of the special game state based on a hit in the high probability There is a possibility that the period of the high probability state that occurs (the period of the high probability state after the second time) and the period of the high probability state of the second time and after will be longer than the period of the high probability state of the first time. Since it becomes higher, it is possible to reduce the winning rate in a short time, and it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.
Here, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 98(a), for example, the variation pattern of N reach short variation is selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the first high-probability state, and the variation patterns of the second and third variations are selected. It is a timing chart which shows an example when the variation pattern of the premier reach variation is selected as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the period of the high probability state of the first time.

In this modification, when the low probability medium flag is saved, the variation pattern of the premier reach variation cannot be selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the high probability state. It is not limited to this. That is, even when the low probability medium flag is saved, the variation pattern of the premier reach variation may be selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the high probability state. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if the selection rate of the variation pattern of the Premier reach variation is higher when the high probability medium flag is saved than when the low probability medium flag is saved, 1 It is possible to increase the possibility that the second and subsequent high-probability state periods are longer than the second high-probability state period.

Specifically, among the fluctuation group tables that can be selected in the high probability state and the result is a big hit, not only the fluctuation group table when the high probability medium flag is saved, but also the low probability medium flag is saved. In the variable group table when the high probability medium flag is saved, it is possible to select the variable group of the premier reach type, and the variation when the high probability medium flag is saved, compared to the variable group table when the low probability medium flag is saved. If the group table is configured so that the distribution ratio of the variable groups of the Premier Reach system is higher, the period of the second and subsequent high probability states can be longer than the period of the first high probability state. You can improve your sex.

Further, by applying the configuration of this modification, it is possible to lengthen the period of the time saving state.
Specifically, for example, at a predetermined timing, if the special game state of this time is based on a hit other than during special time saving, the flag during no time saving is saved, and the special game state of this time is special When it is based on the hit in the time saving, the time saving medium flag is saved.
When the flag without saving time is saved, the fluctuation pattern of the premier reach fluctuation cannot be selected as the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation executed during the period of the time saving state. On the other hand, when the time saving flag is saved, it is possible to select the fluctuation pattern of the premier reach fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation executed during the time saving state.

As a result, a period of a time saving state (first time saving state period) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on a hit other than during the special drawing time saving and the end of the special game state based on a hit during the special drawing saving time Since there is a higher possibility that the period of the time saving state that occurs later (the period of the second time saving state) and the period of the second time saving state will be longer than the period of the first time saving state. It is possible to reduce the winning rate in a short time and prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

<Modification 1-2>
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 98(b), at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the end of the special game state), the special game state this time is based on a hit in a low probability. The high probability medium number is cleared to 0, and if the current special game state is based on the hit in the high probability, the high probability medium number is updated by +1.
Then, when the number of times of high probability middle is 0, the variation pattern of the premier reach variation cannot be selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the high probability state. On the other hand, when the number of high-probability medium times is 1 or more, the variation pattern of the premier reach variation can be selected as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the period of the high-probability state. It is also possible to configure so as to increase the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern of the premier reach fluctuation.

[Big hit end processing]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98(b), the game control device 100 of the present modification executes the big hit ending process shown in FIG. 102, instead of the big hit ending process shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 102, in the big hit ending process of this modified example, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1001), and the special game state this time is a high probability & a short time hit It is determined whether it is based on (step A1002).

When the special game state this time is not based on the high probability & hit during the time saving (step A1002; N), that is, the special game state this time is based on the low probability & hit without time saving, low. If the probability is based on the probability of winning in the probability & shortened time, if it is either, clear the high probability medium frequency area for managing the high probability medium frequency to 0 (step A1033), and the big hit symbol is a V easy symbol. It is determined (step A1003).
When the big hit symbol is not the V easy symbol (step A1003; N), the information of the time saving mode B start is prepared as the production mode after the end of the special game state (step A1004), and the process proceeds to step A1006.
If the big hit symbol is a V easy symbol (step A1003; Y), information for starting the time saving mode A is prepared as an effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1005), and the process proceeds to step A1006.

On the other hand, if the special game state this time is based on the hit in the high probability & time saving (step A1002; Y), the value in the high probability medium frequency area (high probability medium frequency) is updated by +1 ( (Step A1034), information for starting the time saving mode A is prepared as the effect mode after the end of the special game state (step A1005), and the process proceeds to step A1006.
Since the processing after step A1006 (steps A1006 to A1030) is the same as the big hit ending processing shown in FIG. 62, the description of the processing after step A1006 will be omitted.

[Special map information setting process]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98(b), the game control device 100 of this modification executes the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 103 instead of the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. ..
As shown in FIG. 103, in the special figure information setting process of this modified example, first, the variable group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the variable group selection pointer corresponding to the probability state and the stop symbol pattern number is acquired. (Step A452). The stochastic states are low-probability and non-time saving states (low probability & no time saving), high-probability states and time saving states (high probability & time saving), low probability states and time saving (low probability & time saving). It is one of the three states. Further, the stop symbol pattern number is any of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the outlier symbol, the 12R probability variable symbol, the 5R probability variable symbol, the 5R normal symbol, the 4R probability variable symbol, and the 4R normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is the outlier symbol (step A453), and if it is the outlier symbol (step A453; Y), it corresponds to the total value of the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number. The variable group selection pointer is updated to the value (step A454), the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process ends.
In addition, if it is not a falling symbol (step A453; N), that is, if it is a big hit symbol, it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A456).

When the probability state of the special figure variation display game is not the high probability state (step A456; N), that is, the current probability state is neither the low probability state nor the shortened time state (low probability & no reduction time), the low probability state and the shortened time state. If either of the states (low probability & time saving), the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process ends.
On the other hand, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state (step A456; Y), that is, when the current probability state is the high probability state and the short time state (high probability & short time), The variable group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the value in the high-probability medium frequency area (high-probability medium frequency) (step A459), and the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455) to set special figure information. The process ends.

Here, an example of the variation group table in the case where the variation group table in this modification can be selected in the high probability state (probability variation state) and the result is a big hit is shown in FIGS. 104(a) to 104(d). ..
It should be noted that, of the variation group tables in the present modification, the variation group table that can be selected in the high probability state and the result is out of order is the variation group table in the above embodiment that can be selected in the high probability state. This is the same as the variation group table (see FIG. 97(a)) when the result is a failure.

104(a), (b), (c), and (d) show that the high-probability middle frequency is 0 times, 1 time, 2 times, and 3 times or more, respectively. It is a fluctuation group table in the case. These variable group tables are variable group tables selectable by the variable group selection pointer (updated variable group selection pointer) acquired in step A459 in the special figure information setting process shown in FIG.
The variation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by these variation group tables include N reach short system, N reach system, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, SP3 reach system, and premier reach system. Is set. The fluctuation group table shown in FIG. 104(a) is the same as the fluctuation group table (see FIG. 97(b)) that can be selected in the high probability state and the result is a big hit, among the fluctuation group tables in the above embodiment. Is.

As shown in FIGS. 104(a) to 104(d), in the present modification, the fluctuation patterns that are easy to be selected as the fluctuation patterns of the big hit fluctuation in the high probability state period differ according to the high probability middle frequency. Specifically, when the number of times of high probability middle is 0, the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the high probability state is more likely to be selected as the variation pattern of shorter variation time and the variation pattern of longer variation time. The pattern is harder to select. On the other hand, when the number of times of high probability is 1 or more, the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the high probability state is less likely to be selected as the variation pattern of shorter variation time, and the variation pattern of longer variation time is less likely to be selected. In addition to being easily selected, a variation pattern having a long variation time is likely to be selected as the number of times with high probability increases.

As a result, after a high probability state period (first high probability state period) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on a hit in the low probability and after the end of the special game state based on a hit in the high probability There is a possibility that the period of the high probability state that occurs (the period of the high probability state after the second time) and the period of the high probability state of the second time and after will be longer than the period of the high probability state of the first time. Since it becomes higher, it is possible to reduce the winning rate in a short time, and it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

Furthermore, the possibility that the period of the high-probability state becomes long as the number of times that the high-probability state continuously occurs increases (in the case of this modification, the period of the second high-probability state is longer than the period of the first high-probability state). It is more likely that the high probability period will be longer, and the third high probability period will be longer than the second high probability period.) It is possible to effectively prevent the property from becoming too high.
Here, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 98B, for example, the variation pattern of the N reach short variation is selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the first high probability state, and the variation pattern of the second time is changed. The variation pattern of the SP reach variation (SP1, SP2, or SP3 reach variation) is selected as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the period of the stochastic state, and the variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the period of the third high-probability state is selected. 9 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a fluctuation pattern of a premier reach fluctuation is selected as a fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this modification, when the number of times of high probability is 0, the variation pattern of the premier reach variation cannot be selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the high probability state. It is not limited to this. That is, even when the number of times of high probability middle is 0, the variation pattern of the premier reach variation may be selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the high probability state. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern of the premier reach fluctuation is higher when the high probability middle frequency is 1 or more than when the high probability middle frequency is 0, It is possible to increase the possibility that the second and subsequent high probability state periods will be longer than the first high probability state period.

Specifically, of the fluctuation group tables that can be selected in the high probability state and the result is a big hit, the fluctuation group table when the high probability middle frequency is not 0 (in the case of this modification, the high probability middle frequency is high). , The fluctuation group table when the number of times of high probability is two, the fluctuation group table when the number of times of high probability is two, and the fluctuation group table when the number of times of high probability is three or more) Even in the variable group table when the number of times is 0, it is possible to select a variable group of the premier reach type, and when the high probability medium frequency is not 0, compared to the variable group table when the high probability medium frequency is 0. If the variable group table of is configured so that the distribution rate of the variable groups of the premier reach system is higher, the period of the second and subsequent high probability states is longer than the period of the first high probability state. Can be increased.

Further, in the present modification, as shown in FIG. 104(d), the same variable group table is selected when the high-probability medium frequency is 3 or more, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. That is, even when the high-probability medium frequency is 3 or more, different variation group tables may be selected according to the high-probability medium frequency. Further, even when the high-probability medium frequency is 3 or more, different variation group tables are selected according to the high-probability medium frequency, and a variation pattern having a long variation time as the high-probability medium frequency increases. Can be configured to be easily selected.
Further, in this modified example, a variation pattern having a long variation time is easily selected as the number of high-probability medium times increases, but the variation pattern is not limited to this. The pattern selection rate should be increased. That is, as the number of times with a high probability increases, the distribution rate of the variable group of the premier reach system may increase.

Further, by applying the configuration of this modification, it is possible to lengthen the period of the time saving state.
Specifically, for example, at a predetermined timing, if the current special game state is based on hits other than special figure time saving, the number of times with time saving is cleared to 0, and the special game state this time is special. If it is based on the hit in the time saving, the number of times with time saving is updated by +1.
When the number of times with time saving is 0, the variation pattern of the premier reach variation cannot be selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the time saving state. On the other hand, when the number of times with time saving is 1 or more, the variation pattern of the premier reach variation can be selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the time saving state. It is also possible to configure so that the selectivity of the variation pattern of reach variation is increased.

As a result, a period of a time saving state (first time saving state period) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on a hit other than during the special drawing time saving and the end of the special game state based on a hit during the special drawing saving time Since there is a higher possibility that the period of the time saving state that occurs later (the period of the second time saving state) and the period of the second time saving state will be longer than the period of the first time saving state. It is possible to reduce the winning rate in a short time and prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

As described above, in the effect control device 300, based on the reception of the information about the start of the special figure variation display game, the decorative special figure variation display is performed according to the determined variation pattern (variation pattern selected by the game control apparatus 100). Set the detailed performance contents in the game.
In the modified example 1-1 and the modified example 1-2, the effect control device 300 counts the high-probability middle number (or the number of consecutive holidays), and as the high-probability medium number (or the number of consecutive holidays) increases, You may make it increase the production|presentation content which can be set as production|generation content (production content (production mode) of a premier reach production) according to the variation pattern of a Premier reach variation. Thereby, for example, an effect based on a series of stories over a plurality of special figure variable display games (that is, an effect in which the story progresses as the number of times with a high probability of medium (or the number of consecutive holidays) increases), etc. Since it becomes possible to do, it is possible to enhance the interest. Here, the number of consecutive games is the number of continuous occurrences of the special game state in which a high probability state is generated after the special game state ends. The number of consecutive games may be the number of occurrences of the special gaming state within the period of the time saving state (electric support state).

Moreover, in the modified example 1-1 and the modified example 1-2, the variation group of the premier reach system cannot be selected by the variation group table when the result is outlying, and only by the variation group table when the result is big hit. Although it is configured to be selectable (the fluctuation pattern of the premier reach fluctuation is defined as the big hit fixed fluctuation pattern), it is not limited to this. That is, the fluctuation group of the premier reach type may be selected not only by the fluctuation group table when the result is a big hit but also by the fluctuation group table when the result is a big hit.

In addition, in the modified example 1-1, the second and subsequent high probability state periods may be more likely to be shorter than the first high probability state period. Specifically, for example, when the low probability medium flag is saved, the variation pattern of the premier reach variation can be selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the high probability state. On the other hand, when the high probability medium flag is saved, the variation pattern of the premier reach variation may not be selected as the variation pattern of the big hit variation executed during the period of the high probability state. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

In addition, in the modified example 1-2, it is possible to increase the possibility that the period of the high-probability state becomes short as the number of times that the high-probability state continuously occurs increases. Specifically, for example, regardless of the high-probability medium frequency, the variation pattern of the premier reach variation can be selected as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the period of the high-probability state, and the high-probability medium frequency The selection rate of the fluctuation pattern of the premier reach fluctuation may decrease as the number increases. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

In Modification 1-1, regardless of whether the saved last hit probability state flag is the low probability medium flag or the high probability medium flag, the big hit variation executed during the high probability state period is changed. As the variation pattern, the variation pattern of the premier reach variation is configured to be selectable, and when the low probability medium flag is saved, the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the premier reach variation. On the other hand, when the high probability medium flag is saved, the variation pattern of the second variation time longer than the first variation time may be selected as the variation pattern of the premier reach variation.
Further, in the case of such a configuration, the effect control device 300, when the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected and when the variation pattern of the second variation time is selected, the variation display effect before the reach effect. The period of (including the reach effect) is the same, but the period of the temporary stop display effect for temporarily displaying all of the left, middle, and right symbols is different (the variation pattern of the second variation time is the temporary stop display effect). Premier reach production may be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily consuming the game ball. As for the variable display effect before the reach effect, the same effect can be performed when the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected and when the variation pattern of the second variation time is selected.

In Modification 1-2, the variation pattern of the premier reach variation can be selected as the variation pattern of the jackpot variation executed during the period of the high-probability state regardless of the high-probability medium number of times. When the number of times is 0, the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the Premier reach variation, while when the high probability medium number is 1 or more, the variation of the Premier reach variation is selected. As the pattern, a variation pattern having a variation time longer than the first variation time is selected, and it is also possible to configure so that the variation time of the premier reach variation becomes longer as the number of times of high probability increases.
Further, in the case of such a configuration, the effect control device 300 performs the reach effect when the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected and when the variation pattern of the variation time longer than the first variation time is selected. The period of the previous variable display effect (including the reach effect) is the same, and different premier reach effects may be executed during the period of the temporary stop display effect for temporarily displaying all of the left, middle, and right symbols. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily consuming the game ball. As for the variation display effect before the reach effect, the same effect is performed when the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected and when the variation pattern of the variation time longer than the first variation time is selected. be able to.

As described above, in the gaming machines 10 of Modification 1-1 and Modification 1-2, when the result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which the plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed is a special result, the player In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state in which a gaming value is given to a player, after the special gaming state ends, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (in the case of this modification, the probability variation operation area switch 38d detects a game ball). , A specific state (in the case of this modification, a high probability state) in which the occurrence timing of the special game state is more likely to be earlier than the normal state (in the case of this modification, a low probability state (normal probability state)) A specific state generation means (game control device 100) and a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern for executing the variation display game based on a variation pattern table (in the present modification, a variation group table and a variation pattern selection table) (Gaming control device 100), and. Then, in a variable display game executed during a specific state (first high-probability state) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on the variable display game executed during the normal state, a variable display that results in a special result The game is a variable display game, and is a variable display game executed in a specific state (high-probability state after the second time) that occurs after the special game state based on the variable display game executed in the specific state has ended. When the variable display game having a special result is a specific variable display game, the variation pattern setting means sets the variation pattern of the specific variable display game in the variation pattern table set in the normal variable display game (for example, FIG. )), it is possible to set based on a variation pattern table (for example, FIG. 101(b)) in which a variation time longer than that of ()) is easily selected.

Therefore, a specific state period (first specific state period) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on the variable display game executed during the normal state, and a special game state based on the variable display game executed during the specific state It is highly possible that the period of the specific state that occurs after the end of (the period of the specific state after the second) and the period of the specific state after the second are longer than the period of the first specific state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 1-2 executes the identification during the specific state where the number of consecutive occurrences, which is the number of times the particular state occurs consecutively, is the first number of the particular states (for example, the second high probability state). The variable display game is defined as the first specific variable display game, and the specific variable display game executed during the second number of times in which the number of consecutive occurrences is larger than the first number (for example, the third high probability state) is executed in the second. In the case of the specific variation display game, the variation pattern setting means (game control device 100) sets the variation pattern of the second specific variation display game to the variation pattern table set in the first specific variation display game (for example, FIG. 104 ( It is possible to set based on a variation pattern table (for example, FIG. 104(c)) in which a variation time longer than that of b)) is easily selected.

Therefore, as the number of times that the specific state occurs continuously increases, the possibility that the period of the specific state becomes long increases, and it is possible to effectively prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

In the gaming machines 10 of Modification 1-1 and Modification 1-2, the specific state is such that the probability that the result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is a special result is the normal state (low probability state). The probability change state (high probability state) is higher than that of.

Therefore, the probability of the probability change state (high probability state) of the second and subsequent times is longer than that of the first probability change state (high probability state). Can be prevented.
It should be noted that the specific state may be an electric support state (time saving state) in which the game balls are easy to win in the ordinary electric auditors (normal variation winning device 37). That is, the specific state may be a state that is a probable variation state but not an electric support state, a state that is not a probable variation state but an electric support state, or a probable state and an electric support state. It may be in a state.

<Modification 2>
Further, as a method of lengthening the period of the high probability state, for example, one of the variation patterns of the special figure variation display game (hereinafter referred to as “variation variation”) in which the result is off during the period of the high probability state. There is a method of extending the variation time of (variation pattern of short reach variation in the case of this modification).

<Modification 2-1>
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 98(a), at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the end of the special game state), the current special game state is based on a hit in a low probability. If it is, the low probability medium flag is saved, and if the current special game state is based on the hit in the high probability, the high probability medium flag is saved.
Then, when the low probability medium flag is saved, the variation of the first variation time (2.0 seconds in the case of the present modification) is used as the variation pattern of the reachless short variation executed during the high probability state period. Configure the pattern to be selected. On the other hand, when the high probability medium flag is saved, the second variation time longer than the first variation time (in the case of this modification, as the variation pattern of the reachless short variation executed during the high probability state period) It is also possible to configure such that a fluctuation pattern of 2.1 seconds) is selected.

[Big hit end processing]
The big hit ending process of this modification is the same as the big hit ending process of Modification 1-1 (see FIG. 99).
That is, in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98(a), the game control device 100 of the present modification executes the big hit ending process shown in FIG. 99 instead of the big hit ending process shown in FIG.

[Special map information setting process]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98(a), the game control device 100 of the present modification executes the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 105 instead of the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. ..
As shown in FIG. 105, in the special figure information setting process of this modified example, first, the variable group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the variable group selection pointer corresponding to the probability state and the stop symbol pattern number is acquired. (Step A452). The stochastic states are low-probability and non-time saving states (low probability & no time saving), high-probability states and time saving states (high probability & time saving), low probability states and time saving (low probability & time saving). It is one of the three states. Further, the stop symbol pattern number is any of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the outlier symbol, the 12R probability variable symbol, the 5R probability variable symbol, the 5R normal symbol, the 4R probability variable symbol, and the 4R normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is the off symbol (step A453), and if it is not the off symbol (step A453; N), that is, if it is the big hit symbol, the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area ( (Step A455), and the special figure information setting process ends.
If the symbol is out of alignment (step A453; Y), it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A456).

When the probability state of the special figure variation display game is not the high probability state (step A456; N), that is, the current probability state is neither the low probability state nor the shortened time state (low probability & no reduction time), the low probability state and the shortened time state. If either of the states (low probability & time saving), the variable group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the total value of the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number (step A454), and the variable group The pointer is saved in the selection pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process ends.
On the other hand, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state (step A456; Y), that is, when the current probability state is the high probability state and the short time state (high probability & short time), It is determined whether the flag saved in the previous hit probability state flag area is a high probability medium flag (step A457).

When the flag saved in the previous hit probability state flag area is not the high probability medium flag (step A457; N), that is, when the flag saved in the previous hit probability state flag area is the low probability medium flag Updates the variable group selection pointer to a value corresponding to the total value of the special figure 1 reserved number and the special figure 2 reserved number (step A454), and saves the pointer in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455). The figure information setting process ends.
On the other hand, when the previous hit probability state flag is the high probability medium flag (step A457; Y), the variable group selection pointer is updated to the value for the condominium (step A458), and the pointer is moved to the variable group selection pointer area. Is saved (step A455), and the special figure information setting process ends.

Here, an example of the fluctuation group table in the case where the fluctuation group table in this modified example can be selected in the high probability state (probability change state) and the result is out of alignment is shown in FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b). ..
It should be noted that, of the variation group tables in the present modification, the variation group table that can be selected in the high probability state and the result is a big hit is the variation group table in the above embodiment that can be selected in the high probability state. It is the same as the variation group table (see FIG. 97(b)) when the result is a big hit.

FIG. 106A is a fluctuation group table when the low probability medium flag is saved. This variation group table is a variation group table that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer (updated variation group selection pointer) acquired in step A454 in the special figure information setting process shown in FIG.
The variation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by this variation group table are the first short without reach type, N reach short type, no reach type, N reach type, SP1 reach type, SP2 reach type, SP3 reach type. There is a system, and the distribution rate is set for each. Then, for example, when the first fluctuation group of the short circuit without reach is selected, the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation without reach of the first fluctuation time (2.0 seconds in this modification) is selected. ..

FIG. 106(b) is a variation group table when the high probability medium flag is saved. This variation group table is a variation group table that can be selected by the variation group selection pointer (updated variation group selection pointer) acquired in step A458 in the special figure information setting process shown in FIG.
The variation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by this variation group table are the second short without reach type, N reach short type, no reach type, N reach type, SP1 reach type, SP2 reach type, SP3 reach type. There is a system, and the distribution rate is set for each. Then, for example, when the second fluctuation group of the short circuit without reach is selected, the short fluctuation without reach of the second fluctuation time (2.1 seconds in the case of this modification) longer than the first fluctuation time. Variation pattern of is selected.

As shown in FIGS. 106(a) and 106(b), in this modification, during the period of the high probability state, the variation time of the variation pattern selected as the variation pattern of the reachless short variation is saved by the low probability medium flag. It is different when the high probability medium flag is saved. Specifically, when the low probability medium flag is saved, as a variation pattern of the reachless short variation executed during the high probability state period, a variation pattern with a short variation time (in the case of this modification, the variation pattern is changed). A variation pattern of time 2.0 seconds) is selected. On the other hand, when the high probability medium flag is saved, as a variation pattern of the reachless short variation executed during the high probability state period, a variation pattern having a long variation time (variation time 2. The fluctuation pattern of 1 second) is selected.

As a result, after a high probability state period (first high probability state period) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on a hit in the low probability and after the end of the special game state based on a hit in the high probability There is a possibility that the period of the high probability state that occurs (the period of the high probability state after the second time) and the period of the high probability state of the second time and after will be longer than the period of the high probability state of the first time. Since it becomes higher, it is possible to reduce the winning rate in a short time, and it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.
Here, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 98(a), for example, as the variation pattern of the outlier variation executed during the period of the first high-probability state, the variation pattern of the first reachless short variation is selected, and 2 FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a second variation pattern without reach reach short variation is selected as a variation pattern of outlier variation executed during the periods of the high probability state of the third time and the third time.

By applying the configuration of this modification, it is possible to lengthen the period of the time saving state.
Specifically, for example, at a predetermined timing, if the special game state of this time is based on a hit other than during special time saving, the flag during no time saving is saved, and the special game state of this time is special When it is based on the hit in the time saving, the time saving medium flag is saved.
Then, when the flag without saving time is saved, the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the reachless short variation executed during the period of the time saving state. On the other hand, when the time saving presence flag is saved, the variation pattern of the second variation time longer than the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the reachless short variation executed during the period of the time reduction state. It is also possible to configure.

As a result, a period of a time saving state (first time saving state period) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on a hit other than during the special drawing time saving and the end of the special game state based on a hit during the special drawing saving time Since there is a higher possibility that the period of the time saving state that occurs later (the period of the second time saving state) and the period of the second time saving state will be longer than the period of the first time saving state. It is possible to reduce the winning rate in a short time and prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

<Modification 2-2>
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 98(b), at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the end of the special game state), the special game state this time is based on a hit in a low probability. The high probability medium number is cleared to 0, and if the current special game state is based on the hit in the high probability, the high probability medium number is updated by +1.
When the number of times of high probability is 0, the variation of the first variation time (2.0 seconds in the case of this modification) is used as the variation pattern of the reachless short variation executed during the period of the high probability state. Configure the pattern to be selected. On the other hand, when the number of times of high probability is 1 or more, as a variation pattern of the reachless short variation executed during the period of the high probability state, the variation time longer than the first variation time (in the case of the present modification, 2 It is also possible to configure such that a fluctuation pattern of .1 second or more) is selected and the fluctuation time of the reachless short fluctuation becomes longer as the number of times of high probability increases.

[Big hit end processing]
The big hit ending process of this modification is the same as the big hit ending process of Modification 1-2 (see FIG. 102).
That is, in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98(b), the game control device 100 of the present modification executes the big hit ending process shown in FIG. 102 instead of the big hit ending process shown in FIG.

[Special map information setting process]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 98(b), the game control device 100 of this modification executes the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 107 instead of the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. ..
As shown in FIG. 107, in the special figure information setting process of this modified example, first, the variable group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the variable group selection pointer corresponding to the probability state and the stop symbol pattern number is acquired. (Step A452). The stochastic states are low-probability and non-time saving states (low probability & no time saving), high-probability states and time saving states (high probability & time saving), low probability states and time saving (low probability & time saving). It is one of the three states. Further, the stop symbol pattern number is any of 0 to 5 corresponding to each of the outlier symbol, the 12R probability variable symbol, the 5R probability variable symbol, the 5R normal symbol, the 4R probability variable symbol, and the 4R normal symbol.

Next, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol pattern is the off symbol (step A453), and if it is not the off symbol (step A453; N), that is, if it is the big hit symbol, the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area ( (Step A455), and the special figure information setting process ends.
If the symbol is out of alignment (step A453; Y), it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A456).

When the probability state of the special figure variation display game is not the high probability state (step A456; N), that is, the current probability state is neither the low probability state nor the shortened time state (low probability & no reduction time), the low probability state and the shortened time state. If either of the states (low probability & time saving), the variable group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the total value of the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number (step A454), and the variable group The pointer is saved in the selection pointer area (step A455), and the special figure information setting process ends.
On the other hand, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state (step A456; Y), that is, when the current probability state is the high probability state and the short time state (high probability & short time), The variable group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the value in the high-probability medium frequency area (high-probability medium frequency) (step A459), and the pointer is saved in the variable group selection pointer area (step A455) to set special figure information. The process ends.

Here, an example of the variation group table in the case where the variation group table in the present modified example can be selected in the high probability state (probability variation state) and the result is out of alignment is shown in FIGS. 108(a) to 108(d). ..
It should be noted that, of the variation group tables in the present modification, the variation group table that can be selected in the high probability state and the result is a big hit is the variation group table in the above embodiment that can be selected in the high probability state. It is the same as the variation group table (see FIG. 97(b)) when the result is a big hit.

FIGS. 108(a), (b), (c), and (d) show that the high-probability middle frequency is 0 times, 1 time, 2 times, and 3 times or more, respectively. It is a fluctuation group table in the case. These variation group tables are variation group tables selectable by the variation group selection pointer (updated variation group selection pointer) acquired in step A459 in the special figure information setting process shown in FIG.
The variation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by the variation group table when the high-probability middle frequency is 0 are the first reach-less short system, N-reach short system, no-reach system, N-reach system, There are SP1 reach type, SP2 reach type, and SP3 reach type, and the distribution rate is set for each. Then, for example, when the first fluctuation group of the short circuit without reach is selected, the fluctuation pattern of the short fluctuation without reach of the first fluctuation time (2.0 seconds in this modification) is selected. ..

Further, as the variation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by the variation group table when the number of times of high probability middle is one, the second reachless short system, N reach short system, reachless system, N reach System, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, SP3 reach system, and the distribution rate is set for each. Then, for example, when the second fluctuation group of the short circuit without reach is selected, the short fluctuation without reach of the second fluctuation time (2.1 seconds in the case of this modification) longer than the first fluctuation time. Variation pattern of is selected.

Further, the fluctuation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by the fluctuation group table when the high probability middle frequency is 2 are the third reachless short system, N reach short system, reachless system, and N reach system. System, SP1 reach system, SP2 reach system, SP3 reach system, and the distribution rate is set for each. Then, for example, when the third fluctuation group of the short circuit without reach is selected, the short fluctuation without reach of the third fluctuation time (2.2 seconds in the present modification) longer than the second fluctuation time. Variation pattern of is selected.

Further, as the variation groups (variation pattern selection table) that can be selected by the variation group table when the high probability middle frequency is 3 or more, there are the fourth reachless short system, N reach short system, reachless system, N There are reach type, SP1 reach type, SP2 reach type, and SP3 reach type, and the distribution rate is set for each. Then, for example, when the fourth fluctuation group of the short circuit without reach is selected, the short fluctuation without reach of the fourth fluctuation time (2.3 seconds in this modification) longer than the third fluctuation time. Variation pattern of is selected.

As shown in FIGS. 108(a) to 108(d), in this modified example, during the period of the high probability state, the variation time of the variation pattern selected as the variation pattern of the reachless short variation varies depending on the high probability medium frequency. Are different. Specifically, when the high-probability medium frequency is 0, as a variation pattern of the reachless short variation executed during the period of the high-probability state, a variation pattern having a short variation time (in the case of this modification, the variation is short). A variation pattern of time 2.0 seconds) is selected. On the other hand, when the number of times of high probability is 1 or more, as the variation pattern of the reachless short variation executed during the period of the high probability state, the variation pattern of long variation time (variation time of 2 in the case of this modification). The fluctuation time of the reachless short fluctuation becomes longer as the high probability medium frequency increases.

As a result, after a high probability state period (first high probability state period) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on a hit in the low probability and after the end of the special game state based on a hit in the high probability There is a possibility that the period of the high probability state that occurs (the period of the high probability state after the second time) and the period of the high probability state of the second time and after will be longer than the period of the high probability state of the first time. Since it becomes higher, it is possible to reduce the winning rate in a short time, and it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

Furthermore, the possibility that the period of the high-probability state becomes long as the number of times that the high-probability state continuously occurs increases (in the case of this modification, the period of the second high-probability state is longer than the period of the first high-probability state). It is more likely that the high probability period will be longer, and the third high probability period will be longer than the second high probability period.) It is possible to effectively prevent the property from becoming too high.
Here, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 98(b), for example, as the variation pattern of the outlier variation executed during the period of the first high probability state, the first variation pattern of the reachless short variation is selected. The second variation pattern of the short reach-less short variation is selected as the variation pattern of the outlier variation to be executed during the period of the third high probability state, and the variation pattern of the outlier variation to be executed during the period of the third high probability state is selected. 5 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a third variation pattern without reach reach variation is selected.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 108(d), the same variable group table is selected when the high-probability medium frequency is 3 or more, but the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. That is, even when the high-probability medium frequency is 3 or more, different variation group tables may be selected according to the high-probability medium frequency. Further, even when the high-probability medium frequency is 3 or more, different variation group tables are selected according to the high-probability medium frequency, and the variation of the reachless short variation changes as the high-probability medium frequency increases. It is also possible to configure the time to be long.

Further, by applying the configuration of this modification, it is possible to lengthen the period of the time saving state.
Specifically, for example, at a predetermined timing, if the current special game state is based on hits other than special figure time saving, the number of times with time saving is cleared to 0, and the special game state this time is special. If it is based on the hit in the time saving, the number of times with time saving is updated by +1.
Then, when the number of times with time reduction is 0, the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the reachless short variation executed during the period of the time reduction state. On the other hand, when the number of times with time reduction is one or more, the variation pattern of variation time longer than the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the reachless short variation executed during the period of the time reduction state, and It is also possible to configure so that the variation time of the reachless short variation becomes longer as the number of times of shortening and the number of times of medium increase increase.

As a result, a period of a time saving state (first time saving state period) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on a hit other than during the special drawing time saving and the end of the special game state based on a hit during the special drawing saving time Since there is a higher possibility that the period of the time saving state that occurs later (the period of the second time saving state) and the period of the second time saving state will be longer than the period of the first time saving state. It is possible to reduce the winning rate in a short time and prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

Further, in the modified example 2-1, the first fluctuation time is set to 2.0 seconds and the second fluctuation time is set to 2.1 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first fluctuation time and the second fluctuation time are set. The time can be changed as appropriate. When the difference between the first fluctuation time and the second fluctuation time is small as in the present modification, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation time of the reachless short fluctuation has been extended.
The same applies to Modification 2-2. That is, the first fluctuation time, the second fluctuation time, the third fluctuation time, and the fourth fluctuation time can be changed as appropriate. When the difference between the first fluctuation time and the second fluctuation time, the difference between the second fluctuation time and the third fluctuation time, and the difference between the third fluctuation time and the fourth fluctuation time are small as in this modification, , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation time of the short fluctuation without reach is extended.

Here, in the modified example 2-1, the effect control device 300 is at the start of the variation time and when the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected and when the variation pattern of the second variation time is selected. Only the tempo of the effect is changed so that the state of the effect at the end (for example, the state of the decoration (light emission) by the frame decoration device 18 or the panel decoration device 44, the state of the output sound from the speakers 19a and 19b) matches. (Specifically, the tempo of the effect is delayed when the variation pattern of the second variation time is selected). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the variation time of the short reach short variation has been extended.

For example, when the tempo of the effect is the same when the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected and when the variation pattern of the second variation time is selected, The light emission mode of the decorative LED is different or the sounds output from the speakers 19a and 19b are different at the end of the two fluctuation times. Due to such a difference (difference in effect state at the end of the variation time), the player may notice that the variation time of the reachless short variation is extended. On the other hand, by changing only the tempo of the effect so that such a difference does not occur, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the fluctuation time of the short reach fluctuation without reach is extended.
The same applies to Modification 2-2. That is, in the modified example 2-2, the effect control device 300 selects the variation pattern of the first variation time, the variation pattern of the second variation time, and the variation pattern of the third variation time. Only the tempo of the effect is changed so that the state of the effect at the start and the end of the variable time are the same when is selected and when the variation pattern of the fourth variation time is selected. Good. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the variation time of the short reach short variation has been extended.

Further, in the modified example 2-1, the second and subsequent high probability state periods may be more likely to be shorter than the first high probability state period. Specifically, for example, when the low probability medium flag is saved, the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the reachless short variation executed during the period of the high probability state. To do. On the other hand, when the high probability medium flag is saved, a variation pattern having a variation time shorter than the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the reachless short variation executed during the high probability state period. You may. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

In addition, in the modified example 2-2, it is possible to increase the possibility that the period of the high-probability state becomes short as the number of times that the high-probability state continuously occurs increases. Specifically, for example, when the number of times of high probability is 0, the variation pattern of the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the reachless short variation executed during the period of the high probability state. To do. On the other hand, when the number of times of high probability is 1 or more, the variation pattern of the variation time shorter than the first variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the reachless short variation executed during the period of the high probability state. Alternatively, the variation time of the short reachless variation may be shortened as the number of times with high probability increases. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

As described above, in the gaming machines 10 of Modified Example 2-1 and Modified Example 2-2, when the result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) in which the plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed is a special result, the player In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state in which a gaming value is given to a player, after the special gaming state ends, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (in the case of this modification, the probability variation operation area switch 38d detects a game ball). , A specific state (in the case of this modification, a high probability state) in which the occurrence timing of the special game state is more likely to be earlier than the normal state (in the case of this modification, a low probability state (normal probability state)) A specific state generation means (game control device 100), a variation pattern selection means (game control device 100) for selecting a variation pattern of a variation display game, and an effect corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means are executed. The production control means (production control device 300). A variable display game that is executed during a specific state (first high-probability state) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on the variable display game that was executed during the normal state, and the result is not a special result. The game is a variable display game, and is a variable display game executed in a specific state (high-probability state after the second time) that occurs after the special game state based on the variable display game executed in the specific state has ended. When the variable display game that does not give a special result is the specific variable display game, the specific variation pattern with the highest selection rate among the variation patterns of the specific variable display game (for example, the variation pattern of the second reachless short variation) is The variation time is longer than that of the normal variation pattern having the highest selection rate among the variation patterns of the normal variation display game (for example, the variation pattern of the first short reach-less short variation), and the effect control unit determines that the specific variation pattern is It is possible to execute a common effect (in the case of the present modification, an effect in which only the tempo is changed) when the selected variation pattern and the normal variation pattern are selected.

Therefore, a specific state period (first specific state period) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on the variable display game executed during the normal state, and a special game state based on the variable display game executed during the specific state It is highly possible that the period of the specific state that occurs after the end of (the period of the specific state after the second) and the period of the specific state after the second are longer than the period of the first specific state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.
Further, it is determined by the player that the variation pattern for identification (for example, the variation pattern of the second reachless short variation) has a longer variation time than the normal variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern of the first reachless short variation). Can be hard to notice.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 of Modification 2-2, the specification executed during the first specific state (for example, the second high probability state) in which the number of consecutive occurrences, which is the number of times the specific state occurs consecutively, is the first The variable display game is defined as the first specific variable display game, and the specific variable display game executed during the second number of times in which the number of consecutive occurrences is larger than the first number (for example, the third high probability state) is executed in the second. In the case of the specific variation display game, the second specific variation pattern having the highest selection rate among the variation patterns of the second specific variation display game (for example, the variation pattern of the third reachless short variation) is the first specific variation. Of the variation patterns of the display game, the variation time is longer than that of the first identification variation pattern having the highest selection rate (for example, the variation pattern of the second short reach short variation), and the effect control means (effect control device 300) It is possible to execute a common effect (in the case of this modification, an effect in which only the tempo is changed) when the second specifying variation pattern is selected and when the first specifying variation pattern is selected.

Therefore, as the number of times that the specific state occurs continuously increases, the possibility that the period of the specific state becomes long increases, and it is possible to effectively prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

In the gaming machines 10 of Modifications 2-1 and 2-2, the specific state is such that the probability that the result of the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is a special result is the normal state (low probability state). The probability change state (high probability state) is higher than that of.

Therefore, the probability of the probability change state (high probability state) of the second and subsequent times is longer than that of the first probability change state (high probability state). Can be prevented.
It should be noted that the specific state may be an electric support state (time saving state) in which the game balls are easy to win in the ordinary electric auditors (normal variation winning device 37). That is, the specific state may be a state that is a probable variation state but not an electric support state, a state that is not a probable variation state but an electric support state, or a probable state and an electric support state. It may be in a state.

<Modification 3>
As a method of lengthening the high probability state period, for example, there is a method of providing a preparation time between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game in the high probability state period.
When the preparation time is not provided between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game, for example, as shown in the upper diagram of FIG. 98(c), one special figure variation display game When the variation time ends (t141) and the stop display time (display time set in step A603) for displaying the result of the one special figure variation display game elapses (t142), the next special figure variation display game is started. Be started.

On the other hand, when the preparation time is provided between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game, for example, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. When the variation time ends (t151) and the stop display time (display time set in step A603) for displaying the result of the one special figure variation display game (t152) elapses, the preparation time starts. Then, when the preparation time elapses (t153), the next special figure variation display game is started. In the preparation time, as in the stop display time, the special symbol is stopped, so by providing the preparation time, the stop display time (symbol stop time) is apparently extended.

<Modification 3-1>
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 98(a), at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the end of the special game state), the current special game state is based on a hit in a low probability. If it is, the low probability medium flag is saved, and if the current special game state is based on the hit in the high probability, the high probability medium flag is saved.
When the low probability medium flag is saved, the preparation time is not provided between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game executed during the high probability state period. .. On the other hand, when the high probability medium flag is saved, a preparation time (for example, 400 msec) is set between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game executed during the high probability state period. It can be configured to be provided.

As a result, after a high probability state period (first high probability state period) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on a hit in the low probability and after the end of the special game state based on a hit in the high probability The period of the high probability state that occurs (the period of the high probability state after the second time) and the period of the high probability state of the second time and after are shorter than the period of the first high probability state. It is possible to reduce the throwing rate of time and prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

In this modified example, when the low probability medium flag is saved, the preparation time between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game executed during the high probability state period is increased. Although not provided, the invention is not limited to this. That is, the preparation time may be provided even when the low probability medium flag is saved. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if the length of the preparation time is longer when the high probability medium flag is saved than when the low probability medium flag is saved, the first high probability The period of the high probability state after the second time is longer than the period of the state.

Further, by applying the configuration of this modification, it is possible to lengthen the period of the time saving state.
Specifically, for example, at a predetermined timing, if the special game state of this time is based on a hit other than during special time saving, the flag during no time saving is saved, and the special game state of this time is special When it is based on the hit in the time saving, the time saving medium flag is saved.
Then, when the no time saving flag is saved, the preparation time is not provided between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game which are executed during the time saving state period. On the other hand, when the time saving flag is saved, a preparation time may be provided between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game executed during the time saving state period. It is possible.

As a result, a period of a time saving state (first time saving state period) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on a hit other than during the special drawing time saving and the end of the special game state based on a hit during the special drawing saving time Since the period of the time saving state that occurs later (the period of the second time saving state) and the period of the second time saving state are longer than the period of the first time saving state, It is possible to reduce the gambling rate and prevent gambling from becoming too high.

<Modification 3-2>
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 98(b), at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the end of the special game state), the special game state this time is based on a hit in a low probability. The high probability medium number is cleared to 0, and if the current special game state is based on the hit in the high probability, the high probability medium number is updated by +1.
When the number of times of high probability medium is 0, the preparation time is not provided between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game executed during the period of high probability state. .. On the other hand, when the high probability medium number is 1 or more, the preparation time is set between the one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game executed during the high probability state period, and It is also possible to configure so that the preparation time becomes longer as the number of times of probability increases. Specifically, for example, the first preparation time (for example, 200 msec) is set when the high-probability middle frequency is 1, and the first preparation time is set when the high-probability middle frequency is 2 times. A long second preparation time (for example, 400 msec) is set, and when the high-probability medium frequency is three times or more, a third preparation time (for example, 600 msec) longer than the second preparation time is set.

As a result, after a high probability state period (first high probability state period) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on a hit in the low probability and after the end of the special game state based on a hit in the high probability The period of the high probability state that occurs (the period of the high probability state after the second time) and the period of the high probability state of the second time and after are shorter than the period of the first high probability state. It is possible to reduce the throwing rate of time and prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.
Furthermore, the period of the high probability state becomes longer as the number of times of occurrence of the high probability state increases (in the case of this modification, the period of the second high probability state is longer than that of the first high probability state). The period is longer, and the period of the third high-probability state is longer than the period of the second high-probability state.) Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent gambling from becoming too high. You can

In this modification, when the number of high probability medium times is 0, the preparation time is increased between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game executed during the high probability state period. Although not provided, the invention is not limited to this. In other words, the preparation time may be provided even when the number of times with high probability is zero. Further, in the case of such a configuration, if the length of the preparation time is longer when the high-probability medium frequency is 1 or more than when the high-probability medium frequency is 0, the first time is high. The period of the high probability state after the second time is longer than the period of the probability state.

Further, in the present modification, the same preparation time (specifically, the third preparation time) is set when the high-probability middle frequency is three times or more, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, even when the high-probability medium frequency is 3 or more, different preparation times may be set according to the high-probability medium frequency. Further, even when the high-probability medium frequency is 3 or more, different preparation times are set according to the high-probability medium frequency, and the preparation time becomes longer as the high-probability medium frequency increases. It is also possible to configure.

Further, by applying the configuration of this modification, it is possible to lengthen the period of the time saving state.
Specifically, for example, at a predetermined timing, if the current special game state is based on hits other than special figure time saving, the number of times with time saving is cleared to 0, and the special game state this time is special. If it is based on the hit in the time saving, the number of times with time saving is updated by +1.
When the number of times with time saving is 0, the preparation time is not provided between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game executed during the time saving state. On the other hand, when the number of times is 1 or more, the preparation time is provided between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game executed during the time saving state, and there is a time reduction. It is also possible to configure so that the preparation time becomes longer as the number of medium times increases.

As a result, a period of a time saving state (first time saving state period) that occurs after the end of the special game state based on a hit other than during the special drawing time saving and the end of the special game state based on a hit during the special drawing saving time Since the period of the time saving state that occurs later (the period of the second time saving state) and the period of the second time saving state are longer than the period of the first time saving state, It is possible to reduce the gambling rate and prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Further, in the modified example 3-1, the period of the second and subsequent high probability states may be shorter than the period of the first high probability state. Specifically, for example, when the low probability medium flag is saved, the preparation time is set between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game executed during the high probability state period. It is configured to be provided. On the other hand, when the high probability medium flag is saved, it is configured so that no preparation time is provided between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game executed during the high probability state period. May be. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Further, in Modification 3-2, the period of the high probability state may be shortened as the number of times that the high probability state is continuously generated increases. Specifically, for example, regardless of the number of times with high probability, a preparation time is provided between one special figure variation display game and the next special figure variation display game executed during the high probability state period. At the same time, the preparation time may be shortened as the number of times with high probability increases. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

<Modification 4>
Further, as a method of reducing the number of occurrences of the special game state per unit time, for example, there is a method of lengthening the period of the special game state.
As a method of lengthening the period of the special game state, for example, there is a method of extending at least one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time.

<Modification 4-1>
Specifically, as shown in, for example, FIG. 109(a), at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the start of the special game state), the current special game state is based on a hit in a low probability. If it is, the low probability medium flag is saved, and if the current special game state is based on the hit in the high probability, the high probability medium flag is saved.
Then, when the low probability medium flag is saved, the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time are not extended (additional time is not added to any). On the other hand, when the high probability medium flag is saved, at least one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time can be extended (additional time is added to at least one).

[Processing during special figure display]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109(a), the game control device 100 of the present modification executes the special figure displaying process shown in FIG. 110 instead of the special figure displaying process shown in FIG. ..
As shown in FIG. 110, in the special figure displaying process of this modified example, the current hit probability state flag setting process (steps A725 to A727) is executed between step A715 and step A716. This is different from the special figure displaying process (see FIG. 52) of the embodiment.

In the current winning probability state flag setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the current special gaming state is based on the winning with high probability and time saving (step A725).
If the special game state this time is based on a high probability and a hit during a time saving (step A725; Y), the high probability medium flag is saved in the current hit probability state flag area (step A726), The process moves to step A716.
On the other hand, if the special game state this time is not based on a high probability and a hit during a time saving (step A725; N), the low probability medium flag is saved in the current hit probability state flag area (step A727). , The process proceeds to step A716.

In this modification, the current hit probability state flag setting process (steps A725 to A727) is executed between step A715 and step A716, but the present invention is not limited to this. The current hit probability state flag setting process (steps A725 to A727) is performed, for example, after executing a process (steps A705 and A706) of saving a test signal related to the start of the big hit of the special figure variation display game in the test signal output data area. The process may be executed at any timing as long as it is before the process of saving the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern in the special figure game process timer area (step A718).

Then, in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109(a), when the fanfare time is extended, the game control device 100 of the present modification forms a stop symbol pattern in the special figure displaying process shown in FIG. The big hit fanfare time corresponding to the flag and the stop symbol pattern saved in the current hit probability state flag area is replaced with the processing (step A718) of saving the corresponding big hit fanfare time in the special drawing game processing timer area. A process of saving in the game process timer area (step A718a) is executed.

In step A718a, for example, when the flag saved in the hit state probability state flag area this time is a low probability medium flag, the big hit fanfare time (here, 100 msec, 2500 msec, or 500 m) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Any one of the seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.
On the other hand, when the flag saved in the hit state probability state flag area this time is a high probability medium flag, the big hit fanfare time (here, either 100 msec, 2500 msec, or 500 msec) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. ) Is added to a predetermined additional time (for example, 600 msec) to save the time value in the special figure game processing timer area.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109(a), when the interval time is extended, the game control device 100 of the present modified example changes to the process during opening of the special winning opening shown in FIG. The process of opening the special winning opening is executed.
As shown in FIG. 111, in the special winning opening opening process of this modified example, the process of saving the special winning opening opening data and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds in the special figure game processing timer area (step A907) is performed. The point of executing the process (step A907a) of saving the flag saved in the current hit probability state flag area, the special winning opening opening data, and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds in the special figure game processing timer area is as described above. This is different from the special winning opening opening process (see FIG. 59) of the embodiment.

In step A907a, for example, when the flag saved in the hit-time probability state flag area is a low-probability medium flag, the interval time corresponding to the special winning opening opening data and the number of rounds (here, 300 msec, 900 m). Seconds or 1300 ms) in the special figure game processing timer area.
On the other hand, when the flag saved in the hit probability state flag area this time is the high probability medium flag, the interval time corresponding to the special winning opening data and the number of rounds (here, 300 msec, 900 msec, or 1300 m). A time value obtained by adding a predetermined additional time (for example, 600 msec) to any one of the seconds is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

[Remaining sphere processing of big winning mouth]
When the ending time is extended in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109(a), the game control device 100 of the present modification is replaced with the special winning opening remaining ball process shown in FIG. The special winning opening remaining ball processing shown is executed.
As shown in FIG. 112, in the special winning opening remaining ball processing of this modified example, instead of the processing of saving the ending time corresponding to the special winning opening opening data in the special figure game processing timer area (step A954), this time The special winning opening of the above embodiment is that the processing (step A954a) of saving the flag saved in the time probability state flag area and the ending time corresponding to the special winning opening release data in the special figure game processing timer area is executed. Different from the remaining sphere treatment (see FIG. 61).

In step A954a, for example, when the flag saved in the hit-time probability state flag area is a low-probability medium flag, the ending time (here, 100 msec, 2300 msec, or Any 2700 msec) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.
On the other hand, when the flag saved in the current hit probability state flag area is the high probability medium flag, the ending time (here, 100 msec, 2300 msec, or 2700 msec) corresponding to the special winning opening data is selected. Or) to which a predetermined additional time (for example, 600 msec) is added, is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

Thereby, the period of the special game state based on the hit in the low probability (the period of the first special game state) and the period of the special game state based on the hit in the high probability (of the special game state of the second and subsequent times Period), and the period of the second special game state after the first special game state is longer than the period of the first special game state, it is possible to reduce the winning rate in a short time, and the gambling rate is high. It can be prevented from becoming too much.

In this modification, when the low probability medium flag is saved, the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time are not extended (additional time is not added to any of them). It is not limited to That is, even when the low probability medium flag is saved, at least one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time may be extended (additional time is added to at least one). Further, in the case of such a configuration, if the length of the additional time is longer when the high probability medium flag is saved than when the low probability medium flag is saved, the first special game. The special game state period after the second time is longer than the state period.

Further, in the present modification, for example, at a predetermined timing, if the special game state of this time is based on a hit other than during the special drawing time saving, the flag without time saving is saved, and the special game state of this time is saved. If is based on the hit in the special figure time saving, the medium flag with time saving is saved.
When the no-time saving medium flag is saved, the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time are not extended (additional time is not added to any of them). On the other hand, when the time saving flag is saved, it is possible to extend at least one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time (add the additional time to at least one).

As a result, a special game state period (first special game state period) based on a hit other than during the special figure time saving and a special game state period based on a hit during the special figure time saving (second and subsequent special times The period of the game state) and the period of the second special game state after the first special game state are longer than the period of the first special game state. It is possible to prevent the property from becoming too high.

<Modification 4-2>
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 109(b), at a predetermined timing (in the case of this modification, at the start of the special game state), the current special game state is based on a hit in a low probability. The high probability medium number is cleared to 0, and if the current special game state is based on the hit in the high probability, the high probability medium number is updated by +1.
When the high-probability middle frequency is 0, the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time are not extended (additional time is not added to any). On the other hand, if the high-probability medium frequency is 1 or more, at least one of fanfare time, interval time, and ending time is extended (additional time is added to at least one), and the high-probability medium frequency is high. It is also possible to configure so that the additional time to be added becomes longer as the time increases.

[Processing during special figure display]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109(b), the game control device 100 of the present modification executes the special figure displaying process shown in FIG. 113 instead of the special figure displaying process shown in FIG. ..
As shown in FIG. 113, in the special figure displaying process of the present modified example, the high probability middle number setting process (steps A728 to A730) is executed between step A715 and step A716 in the above embodiment. This is different from the special figure displaying process (see FIG. 52).

In the high-probability middle-number setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special game state this time is based on a high probability and a hit during a time saving (step A728).
If the special game state this time is based on the hit in the high probability and time saving (step A728; Y), the value in the high probability medium frequency area (high probability medium frequency) is updated by +1 (step A729). ), and proceeds to the processing of step A716.
On the other hand, if the special game state this time is not based on the hit in the high probability & time saving (step A728; N), the high probability medium number area is cleared to 0 (step A730), and the process of step A716 is performed. Transition.

In this modification, the high-probability medium frequency setting process (steps A728 to A730) is executed between step A715 and step A716, but the present invention is not limited to this. The high-probability middle-number setting process (steps A728 to A730) is stopped after executing the process (steps A705 and A706) of saving the test signal related to the start of the big hit of the special figure variation display game in the test signal output data area, for example. It may be executed at any timing as long as it is before the process (step A718) of saving the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the symbol pattern in the special figure game process timer area.

Then, in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109(b), when the fanfare time is extended, the game control device 100 of the present modification, in the special figure displaying process shown in FIG. Instead of the process of saving the corresponding jackpot fanfare time in the special figure game processing timer region (step A718), the process of saving the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the high probability medium number and the stop symbol pattern in the special figure game processing timer region ( Perform step A718b).

In Step A718b, for example, when the high-probability medium number is 0, the big hit fanfare time (here, 100 msec, 2500 msec, or 500 msec) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set to the special figure game processing timer. Save to area.
On the other hand, when the number of times with high probability is one, the predetermined first additional time (eg, 100 msec, 2500 msec, or 500 msec) for the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (for example, 100 μsec, here) The time value obtained by adding 400 msec) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

In addition, when the number of times of high probability is two times, a predetermined second additional time (for example, 100 msec, 2500 msec, or 500 msec) for the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (for example, 100 msec, here) The time value obtained by adding (600 msec) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.
When the number of times of high probability is 3 or more, the predetermined third additional time (in this case, 100 msec, 2500 msec, or 500 msec) for the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern ( The time value obtained by adding (for example, 800 msec) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
In order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109(b), when the interval time is extended, the game control device 100 of the present modified example changes to the special winning opening opening process shown in FIG. The process of opening the special winning opening is executed.
As shown in FIG. 114, in the special winning opening opening process of this modified example, instead of the process of saving the special winning opening data and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds in the special figure game processing timer area (step A907). The processing for saving the special winning game opening timer data and the interval time corresponding to the high winning medium opening number data, the big winning opening opening data, and the number of rounds (step A907b) is executed during the big winning opening opening processing of the above embodiment. (See FIG. 59).

In Step A907b, for example, when the high probability middle number is 0, the special winning opening data and the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds (here, either 300 msec, 900 msec, or 1300 msec) are specified. Save in the figure game processing timer area.
On the other hand, when the number of high-probability medium is 1, the predetermined first opening is performed at the interval time (here, either 300 msec, 900 msec, or 1300 msec) corresponding to the special winning opening data and the number of rounds. The time value obtained by adding the additional time (for example, 400 msec) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

In addition, when the high-probability medium number is 2, the predetermined second number is set at the interval time (here, either 300 msec, 900 msec, or 1300 msec) corresponding to the special winning opening data and the number of rounds. The time value obtained by adding the additional time (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.
In addition, when the high-probability medium number is 3 or more, a predetermined number of times is given at an interval time (here, either 300 msec, 900 msec, or 1300 msec) corresponding to the special winning opening data and the number of rounds. A time value obtained by adding 3 additional times (for example, 800 msec) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

[Remaining sphere processing of big winning mouth]
When the ending time is extended in order to realize the timing chart shown in FIG. 109(b), the game control device 100 of the present modified example changes to the special winning opening remaining ball process shown in FIG. The special winning opening remaining ball processing shown is executed.
As shown in FIG. 115, in the special winning opening remaining ball processing of this modified example, instead of the processing of saving the ending time corresponding to the special winning opening opening data in the special figure game processing timer area (step A954), there is a high probability. The special winning game remaining ball processing (see FIG. 61) of the above embodiment is that the processing (step A954b) of saving the ending time corresponding to the medium number and the special winning opening opening data in the special figure game processing timer area is executed. different.

In step A954b, for example, when the high probability middle number is 0, the ending time (here, 100 msec, 2300 msec, or 2700 msec) corresponding to the special winning opening opening data is set to the special figure game processing. Save to the timer area.
On the other hand, when the high probability middle number is 1, the predetermined first additional time (here, 100 msec, 2300 msec, or 2700 msec) is added to the ending time corresponding to the special winning opening opening data. The time value obtained by adding (for example, 400 msec) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

In addition, when the number of times with high probability is two, the predetermined second additional time (in this case, 100 msec, 2300 msec, or 2700 msec) corresponding to the special winning opening opening data is added. The time value obtained by adding (for example, 600 msec) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.
In addition, when the high probability middle frequency is 3 or more, the predetermined third additional time is added to the ending time (here, 100 msec, 2300 msec, or 2700 msec) corresponding to the special winning opening data. The time value obtained by adding (for example, 800 msec) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area.

Thereby, the period of the special game state based on the hit in the low probability (the period of the first special game state) and the period of the special game state based on the hit in the high probability (of the special game state of the second and subsequent times Period), and the period of the second special game state after the first special game state is longer than the period of the first special game state, it is possible to reduce the winning rate in a short time, and the gambling rate is high. It can be prevented from becoming too much.
Furthermore, as the number of times the high-probability state occurs consecutively (that is, the number of times the special gaming state occurs consecutively) becomes longer, the period of the special gaming state becomes longer (in the case of this modification, the first special state). Because the period of the second special game state is longer than the period of the game state and the period of the third special game state is longer than the period of the second special game state) It is possible to effectively prevent the property from becoming too high.

In addition, in the present modification, when the high-probability middle frequency is 0, the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time are not extended (additional time is not added to any of them). It is not limited to That is, even when the high-probability middle frequency is 0, at least one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time may be extended (additional time is added to at least one). In addition, in the case of such a configuration, if the length of the additional time is longer when the high-probability medium number is 1 or more than when the high-probability medium number is 0, the first special time is longer. The period of the special game state after the second time is longer than the period of the game state.

In addition, in the present modification, the same additional time (specifically, the third additional time) is configured to be added when the number of times of high probability middle is 3 or more, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, even when the high-probability mid count is three or more, different additional time may be added according to the high-probability mid count. Further, even when the high-probability medium frequency is 3 or more, different additional time is added according to the high-probability medium frequency, and the addition time becomes longer as the high-probability medium frequency increases. It is also possible to configure.

Further, for example, when the high probability middle frequency is the first frequency (for example, once), one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time is extended, and the high probability medium frequency is higher than the first frequency. If the number of times is the second number that is also high (for example, 2 times), any two of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time are extended, and the third number of times when the high probability middle number is higher than the second number (for example, 2 times). (3 times), the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time can all be extended.

Further, in this modification, for example, at a predetermined timing, if the special game state of this time is based on a hit other than the special figure time saving, the number of times with time saving is cleared to 0, and the special game this time. When the state is based on the hit in the special figure time saving, the number of times with time saving is updated by +1.
Then, when the number of times with time saving and medium number is 0, the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time are not extended (additional time is not added to any of them). On the other hand, if the number of times with time reduction is 1 or more, at least one of fanfare time, interval time, and ending time is extended (additional time is added to at least one), and the number of times with time reduction is large. It is also possible to configure so that the additional time to be added becomes longer as the time increases.

As a result, a special game state period (first special game state period) based on a hit other than during the special figure time saving and a special game state period based on a hit during the special figure time saving (second and subsequent special times The period of the game state) and the period of the second special game state after the first special game state are longer than the period of the first special game state. It is possible to prevent the property from becoming too high.

Further, in Modification 4-1 and Modification 4-2, it is possible to extend the remaining ball processing time in order to lengthen the period of the special game state.
In addition, in the modified example 4-1 and the modified example 4-2, the effect control device 300 counts the high-probability middle number (or the number of consecutive holidays), and the high-probability medium number (or the number of consecutive holidays) increases. Accordingly, the selection rate of a predetermined effect executed during the special game state (for example, promotion effect executed during the interval) may be increased.

Moreover, in the modification 4-1 and the modification 4-2, for example, when extending the ending time, the effect control device 300, the ending time corresponding to the special winning opening opening data (here, 100 msec, 2300 msec, Or 2700 msec), the ending effect is executed, and after the ending effect is finished, the additional effect of displaying the game history or the company logo in the extended time (additional time) is performed. It is possible to configure. Further, in the case of such a configuration, a liquid crystal display device may be provided separately from the display device 41 including three 7-segment displays, and the liquid crystal display device may be used to perform the additional effect.

Further, in the modified example 4-1, the period of the second and subsequent special game states may be shorter than the period of the first special game state. Specifically, for example, when the low probability medium flag is saved, at least one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time is extended. On the other hand, when the high probability medium flag is saved, the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time may not be extended. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

Further, in the modified example 4-2, the period of the special gaming state may be shortened as the number of times the high-probability state continuously occurs increases. Specifically, for example, it is configured to extend at least one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time regardless of the high-probability medium frequency, and the additional time to be added is shortened as the high-probability medium frequency increases. It may be configured to be. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high.

<Modification 5>
In addition, as a method of preventing the number of prize balls paid out per unit time from becoming too large and preventing gambling from becoming too high, the greater the value of the game given in the special gaming state, the greater the game value. There is a method of lengthening the time set in.

<Modification 5-1>
As a method of lengthening the time set in the game, there is a method of lengthening the period of the special game state. As a method of lengthening the period of the special game state, for example, there is a method of extending at least one of the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time.

In this modification, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player in the special game state is set as the value of the game value, and the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time are set accordingly. FIG. 116 shows the fanfare time, interval time, and ending time set for each special result. The opening mode of the special variation winning device in the special game state based on each special result is as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, but in the present modification, it is shown in FIG. 116 as the fanfare time, the interval time and the ending time. Use time.

From the opening state of the special variation winning device shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8, the special game state based on 12R probability variation is the special game state in which the number of award balls that can be obtained is the largest. That is, it is a special game state in which the game value to be given is the largest. Further, the special game states based on the 5R probability variation, the 5R normal and the 4R probability variation are special game states in which almost the same degree of prize balls can be obtained, and the number of award balls that can be acquired is smaller than the special game state based on the 12R probability variation. .. That is, it is a special game state in which the game value to be given is smaller than the special game state based on the 12R probability variation. The special game state based on the 4R normal is the special game state in which the number of award balls that can be obtained is the smallest. That is, it is a special game state in which the game value given is the smallest.

In this way, the game value that can be given in the special game state includes at least the first game value and the second game value that is smaller than the first game value. In other words, if the special game state based on the 12R probability change is the first special game state in which the first game value can be given as the game value, the special game state based on the 5R probability change, the 5R normal, the 4R probability change, and the 4R normal is the first game state. A second special game state in which a second game value smaller than the game value is given is entered. Further, if the special game state based on the 5R probability change, the 5R normal and the 4R probability change is the first special game state that gives the first game value as the game value, the special game state based on the 4R normal is more than the first game value. The second special game state in which a small second game value is given is entered.

In this modification, as shown in FIG. 116, the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time are set to be longer as the game value to be given is larger. That is, the fanfare, the interval, and the ending, or a period in which these are combined, is set as a specific period, and the length of this specific period is set longer as the gaming value to be given is greater. That is, the length of the specific period to be selected is longer when the first game value is selected than when the second game value is selected.

By doing so, in the special game state based on the 12R probability variation in which the number of prize balls to be paid out is large, it takes a long time to progress to the special game state, the number of prize balls per unit time is suppressed, and the gambling probability is high. It can be prevented from becoming too much. In addition, by reducing the fanfare time, interval time, and ending time as the number of prize balls paid out in the special game state decreases, the digestion of the special game state and the continuous play It is possible to give a sense of speed, and it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

Regarding the setting of such a specific period, in step A718 in the special figure displaying process shown in FIG. 52, the special figure game processing timer area is set as the jackpot fanfare time with the time value shown in FIG. 116 corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number. Try to save to. Further, in step A907 in the special winning opening opening process shown in FIG. 59, the time value shown in FIG. 116 corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is saved as the interval time in the special figure game process timer area. Further, the remaining ball processing time set in step A911 in the special winning opening opening processing shown in FIG. 59 and the ending time set in step A954 in the special winning opening remaining ball processing shown in FIG. 61 are combined. About time, it sets so that it may become the ending time shown in FIG. 116 corresponding to a stop symbol pattern number.

In addition, here, the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time are all set according to the size of the game value that can be acquired, but only one or two of these can be acquired. It may be set according to the size. Also, the interval occurs a plurality of times in one special game state, but it may be set corresponding to the magnitude of the game value that can be acquired for all of them, or some of the intervals May be set according to the magnitude of the game value that can be obtained.

Also, by setting the fanfare time and interval time according to the value of the game value, the fanfare time and interval time can be set long even if the special result variation display game is not clearly notified. Therefore, there is another effect that the type of special result can be suggested or notified. For example, in a gaming machine that performs promotion effects on whether or not subsequent rounds continue in a given round, it is possible to infer whether the round will continue from the execution mode of the special game state before execution of the promotion effects. Next, it is possible to create a new interest.

<Modification 5-2>
As a method of lengthening the time set in the game, there is a method of lengthening the execution time of the special figure variation display game before the occurrence of the special game state. As a method of lengthening the execution time of the special figure variation display game, for example, there is a method of extending at least one of the variation time and the stop time.

In this modified example, the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player in the special game state is set as the value of the game value, and the variation time and stop time of the special figure variation display game, which is a special result, are set according to the game value. ing. FIG. 117 shows the variable time and the stop time set corresponding to each special result.

As shown in FIG. 117(a), in the special figure variation display game with 12R probability variation, only variation patterns of SP3 reach system with variation time of 90 seconds or 105 seconds and premier reach system with variation time of 120 seconds can be selected. .. Further, in the special figure variation display game in which 5R probability variation, 5R normal variation or 4R probability variation as shown in FIG. 117(b), a variation pattern of SP1 reach system with variation time of 30 seconds or 45 seconds and variation time of 60 seconds or Only the 75 second SP2 reach system can be selected. In addition, in the special figure variation display game that is normally 4R as shown in FIG. 117(c), only variation patterns of N reach short system with a variation time of 10 seconds and N reach system with a variation time of 15 seconds or 20 seconds are selected as variation patterns. It is possible. As a result, the variation time becomes longer as the game value provided increases. Further, as shown in FIG. 117(d), the greater the gaming value to be given, the longer the stop time.

That is, each of the variable time and the stop time or a period in which these are combined is set as a specific period, and the length of this specific period is set longer as the gaming value given is greater. That is, the length of the specific period to be selected is longer when the first game value is selected than when the second game value is selected.

By doing so, when a special game state based on the 12R probability variation with a large number of prize balls to be paid out occurs, it takes a long time until the special game state occurs, particularly when the last special game state is close. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the number of prize balls per unit time from being suppressed and the gambling performance to become too high. Also, by making the fluctuation time and stop time shorter as the number of prize balls paid out in the special game state decreases, it is possible to give the sense of speed of the condominium in the range where gambling is not too high, It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing.

With regard to the setting of such variation time and stop time, in step A452 in the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 47, when the result is a special result, the stop symbol pattern number is used to correspond to FIGS. 117(a) to (a). One of the tables in c) is selected, and in the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 48, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the selected table. In step A603 in the special figure changing process shown in FIG. 51, the stop time shown in FIG. 117(d) is selected corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number.

In addition, here, the variable time and the stop time are both set according to the amount of the game value that can be obtained, but only one of them is set according to the amount of the game value that can be obtained. It may be set.

In addition, the variation time and stop time of the special figure variation display game that is a special result are set according to the game value given in the special game state, but the special figure before the special figure variation display game that is a special result is set. Also for the variable display game, the variable time and the stop time may be set according to the game value to be given. The fact that the special result is derived is known by a prior determination at the time of the occurrence of the starting memory, and thus the fluctuation time and the stop time set thereafter can be set according to the special result. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high, and it is also possible to provide a pre-reading notice effect based on the change time or the stop time, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in FIGS. 117(a) to (c), the selectable variation patterns are made different according to the game value to be given, but by doing so, the reach state is set in the special figure variation display game. It is possible to have an unprecedented staging effect in which it is possible to guess a special result that may be derived at the time when the game has become available, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. In addition, as an execution mode of reach production, first, N reach type production is started, and if it develops from here to SP reach type or premier reach type reach production, the development of reach production is promoted to a special result. It is possible to provide an unprecedented staging effect that corresponds to, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in FIGS. 117(a) to 117(c), the change patterns that can be selected are made different depending on the game value to be given, but the same change pattern is used even when the game values to be given are different. May be selected. For example, the variation time in the variation pattern and the expected value of the variation time obtained from the selection probability of the variation pattern may be set to be different depending on the game value provided.

In the above example, the second special game state occurs when the length of the specific period (fanfare, interval, ending, variation time and stop time) selected when the first special game state occurs. Although it is assumed that the length is longer than the length of the specific period selected in this case, the present invention is not limited to this. When selecting the length of the specific period, a lottery is performed from among a plurality of types of time values. It suffices that the probability of selecting a longer specific period is higher when the special gaming state occurs than when the second special gaming state occurs. In addition, when the first special game state occurs, the second special game state occurs when the expected value obtained from the selectable time value and the selection probability at each of the selectable time values in this lottery occurs. It can be said that it is better if it is larger than the case.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player A control means (game control device 100) for controlling is provided, and the control means is provided as a special game state, at least a first special game state in which a first game value can be given, or more than the first game value. It is possible to generate a second special game state in which a second game value having a small game value can be given, and a length of a specific period set in the game can be selected according to the special game state that occurs, The length of the specific period selected when the special gaming state occurs is longer than the length of the specific period selected when the second special gaming state occurs. Further, when the first special game state occurs, the probability of selecting a longer specific period is higher than when the second special game state occurs. Further, the control means is adapted to set the execution time of the game to the specific period. Further, the control means is adapted to set the execution time of the special game state to the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

Further, the control means can select one special result from a plurality of types of special results as a special result, and can select a game value to be given in the special game state based on the selected special result. It is possible to select the length of the specific period set in the game based on the game value, and the game value is at least a first game value and a second game in which the game value provided is smaller than the first game value. When the value is included and the first game value is selected, the length of the selected specific period is longer than when the second game value is selected.

<Variation 5-3>
Further, in the gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability in the gaming machine can be selected from a plurality of stages by operating the setting switch provided on the back surface of the gaming machine, the length of the specific period varies depending on the setting of the jackpot probability. Is also good. The setting switch is provided in the game control device 100, the information set by this setting switch is input to the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, and the jackpot probability according to the setting switch is set by the game microcomputer 111. It has become so.

For example, as shown in FIG. 118(a), the jackpot probability can be selected from setting 1 with probability 1/269, setting 2 with probability 1/289, and setting 3 with probability 1/308. To do. That is, if the probability value of the setting 1 is the first probability value, the probability values of the settings 2 and 3 are the second probability values lower than the first probability value. If the probability value of setting 2 is the first probability value, the probability value of setting 3 is the second probability value lower than the first probability value. Note that the probabilities shown in FIG. 118A are probability values in the normal probability state in each setting, and the probability values in the high probability state are 10 times the probability values in the normal probability state.

Then, the fanfare time, the interval time, and the ending time are selected as shown in FIGS. 118(b) to 118(d) according to the setting of the jackpot probability. Here, the higher the jackpot probability is, the higher the probability of selecting a long time is, and it is possible to prevent the number of prize balls paid out per unit time from becoming too large and prevent the gambling performance from becoming too high. I am trying.

Specifically, in step A718 in the special figure displaying process shown in FIG. 52, the time value determined by lottery according to the probability shown in FIG. 118(b) corresponding to the setting of the big hit probability is set as the big hit fanfare time. Save it in the special figure game processing timer area. For example, in the case of setting 1, as the fanfare time, 3000 ms is selected with a probability of 70%, 1000 ms is selected with a probability of 20%, and 500 ms is selected with a probability of 10%.

Further, in step A907 in the processing for opening the special winning opening shown in FIG. 59, the special figure game is set as the interval time by the time value determined by lottery according to the probability shown in FIG. 118(c) corresponding to the setting of the big hit probability. Save it in the processing timer area. For example, in the case of setting 1, as the interval time, 1300 ms is selected with a probability of 70%, 900 ms is selected with a probability of 20%, and 300 ms is selected with a probability of 10%. It should be noted that the interval occurs a plurality of times in one special game state, but it may be set corresponding to the setting of the big hit probability for all of them, or the big hit probability for some intervals of a plurality of times. You may make it set according to setting.

Further, the remaining ball processing time set in step A911 in the special winning opening opening processing shown in FIG. 59 and the ending time set in step A954 in the special winning opening remaining ball processing shown in FIG. 61 are combined. The time is set to be the time value determined by lottery according to the probability shown in FIG. 118(d) corresponding to the setting of the jackpot probability. For example, in the case of setting 1, 5000 ms is selected with a probability of 70% as the ending time, which is the sum of the remaining ball processing time set in step A911 and the ending time set in step A954, and 3000 ms is selected. Is selected with a probability of 20% and 2000 ms is selected with a probability of 10%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, the selection probability of the variation pattern and the selection probability of the stop time may be changed according to the set jackpot probability. As shown in FIGS. 119(a) to 119(c), the higher the jackpot probability is, the higher the probability of selecting a long-time fluctuation pattern is, and the number of prize balls paid out per unit time becomes too large. We are trying to prevent this from happening too much and prevent gambling from becoming too high. In addition, as shown in FIG. 119(d), the higher the jackpot probability, the higher the probability of selecting a long stop time is. This prevents the number of prize balls paid out per unit time from becoming too large. I try to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Regarding the setting of such variation time and stop time, in step A452 in the special figure information setting process shown in FIG. 47, in the case where the result is a special result, the jackpot probability is dealt with and corresponding to FIGS. 119(a) to (c). 48 is selected, and in the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 48, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the selected table. Further, in step A603 in the special figure changing process shown in FIG. 51, the stop time determined by lottery is set according to the probability shown in FIG. 119(d) corresponding to the jackpot probability.

In FIGS. 118 and 119, the higher the jackpot probability is, the higher the probability of selecting a long time is. However, since the time value is selected from a plurality of time values, the set jackpot probability is early. It can be prevented from being revealed. Also, it can be used as a clue for the player to guess the set jackpot probability, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Of course, a single time value or variation pattern may be selected according to the setting of the jackpot probability.

Further, in FIGS. 118 and 119, the fanfare time, the interval time, the ending time, the fluctuation time, and the stop time are set corresponding to the probability values, but the time values are set regardless of the probability values. You can have it. Further, in the special figure variation display game in which the result is out of proportion, the variation time or the stop time may be selected in accordance with the probability value.

Further, the fanfare time, the interval time, the ending time, the variation time, and the stop time may have time values that can be selected only when they have a specific probability value. For example, if a time value that can be selected only with each probability value is provided for each of the settings 1 to 3, the probability value can be clearly understood by the player when the time value is selected. Further, if only the time value that can be selected is provided only in the setting 1, it becomes possible to understand that the setting is most advantageous to the player.

Further, in FIGS. 118 and 119, the length of the specific period is set according to the probability value in the normal probability state shown in FIG. 118(a), but according to the probability value in the high probability state. You may make it set the length of a specific period. Big hits occur more frequently in the high probability state than in the normal probability state.Therefore, by setting the length of the specific period according to the probability value in the high probability state, the number of prize balls paid out per unit time becomes too large. The effect of suppressing euphoria from becoming too high by suppressing the above becomes more remarkable. In addition, in the above example, since the probability value in the high probability state is 10 times the probability value in the normal probability state in all of the settings 1 to 3, the specific period is set according to the probability value in the high probability state. It can be said that it is set.

From the above, when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result, a game machine that can generate a special game state that gives a game value to a player A control means (game control device 100) for controlling and a setting means (game control device 100) that allows selection of a probability value used for lottery of special results from a plurality of kinds of probability values by operating a setting switch. The control means can select the length of the specific period set in the game according to the probability value, and the second probability lower than the first probability when the first probability value is set as the probability value. The probability of selecting a long specific period is higher than when a probability value is set. Further, the control means sets the execution time of the game to the specific period. Further, the control means sets the execution time of the special game state to the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

In the fifth modification, the game value to be given is the number of prize balls that can be acquired in the special game state, but the number of rounds may be used as the game value without considering the number of prize balls that can be acquired. , Such as fanfare time, interval time, ending time, fluctuation time or stop time as the game value whether it becomes a probable state after the end of the special game state or whether it becomes a time saving state after the end of the special game state. The length of the specific period may be different.

When the probability variation state is reached, the probability of deriving the next special result is higher than when it is not the probability variation state, and there is a high possibility that the number of prize balls per unit time will increase, so that the gaming value is high. Therefore, when the probability variation state is set, the gambling property can be prevented from becoming too high by increasing the length of the specific period as compared to the case where the probability variation state is not set. In addition, when it is in the time saving state, it is more likely that the time to derive the next special result will be shorter than when it is not in the time saving state, and the number of prize balls per unit time is likely to increase, so the game value Is big. Therefore, when the time-saving state occurs, the gambling property can be prevented from becoming too high by increasing the length of the specific period as compared with the case where the time-saving state does not occur.

In addition, by setting the length of the specific period in correspondence with the magnitude of the game value as the game value, it is determined whether or not the probability variation hits with a high possibility that the game ball will flow into the probability variation operating region 38h will result. Another effect is that the type of special result can be suggested or notified from the length of the specific period even if the type of special result is not clearly notified in the variable display game.

In addition, whether the probability variation state or the time saving state is the same in a gaming machine that determines whether or not the probability variation state or the time saving state is determined only by the type of the special result without the condition that the game balls flow into the probability variation operation region 38h. By setting the length of the specific period in correspondence with the magnitude of the game value, with the game value as whether or not, the length of the specific period can be extended even if the type of special result is not clearly notified in the decorative special figure variation display game. Therefore, there is another effect that the type of special result can be suggested or notified. Furthermore, even when the so-called latent state in which the probability state is not clearly notified is set as the game state after the end of the special game state, the probability state can be estimated from the length of the specific period.

In addition, the display on the display device 41, voice, LED, or the like is provided so that the player can grasp the length of the specific period such as the fanfare time, the interval time, the ending time, the variation time, the length of the stop time. You may do it. By doing so, it becomes possible to visually confirm the game value to be given, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

From the viewpoint of preventing gambling from becoming too high, it is necessary to increase the length of the specific period as the game value provided is higher or the set jackpot probability is higher. From the viewpoint of improving the game value, the length of the specific period may be set according to the game value to be given or according to the set jackpot probability. The length of the specific period may be shortened as the jackpot probability is higher, or the size of the game value to be given or the set jackpot probability may not be proportional to the length of the specific period. Further, the specific period may be set as the specific period in the effect, and for example, the period in which the specific effect is executed may be set according to the game value to be given. For example, even if the changing time is the same, the period in which the specific effect is executed may be different.

Moreover, the lengths of the specific periods corresponding to the special results may be in an integral multiple relationship with each other. The fanfare time shown in FIG. 116 has such a relationship, and other interval times, ending times, fluctuation times, and stop time lengths may also be set in this way. By making the length of time of the specific period corresponding to each special result an integer multiple of each other, if the production of the shortest time value is repeated, it can be used as the production of other time values, and data related to production is reduced. be able to.

For example, regarding the fanfare time shown in FIG. 116, the fanfare time in the special game state based on the 12R probability change is 6 times the fanfare time in the special game state based on the 4R normal. Further, the fanfare time in the special game state based on the 5R probability variation, 5R normal and 4R probability variation is twice the fanfare time in the special game state based on the 4R normal variation. Therefore, the fanfare effect in the special game state based on the 12R probability variation may be such that the fanfare effect in the special game state based on the 4R normal state is repeated 6 times, in the special game state based on the 5R probability variation, the 5R normal rate and the 4R probability variation. As for the fanfare production, the fanfare production in the special game state based on the 4R normal may be repeated twice.

In addition, while maintaining the relationship of the length of the specific period according to the game value to be given, in combination with the above-described embodiment and each modification, whether or not it is a big hit in the normal probability state, The length of the specific period may be set in consideration of the number of times. For example, in the case of the big hit in the normal probability state, the time values of FIGS. 116 to 119 are used, and in the case of the big hit in the high probability state, the time value obtained by multiplying the time of FIGS. 116 to 119 by a predetermined value is used. You can Further, a time value obtained by multiplying the time value of FIGS. 116 to 119 by a value that changes according to the number of consecutive holidays may be used.

Also in the universal figure variation display game, the game value given to the normal variation winning device 37 in the hit state of the universal figure based on the derivation of the winning result is different, so the fanfare time and the interval in the hit state of the universal figure are different. It is also possible to set the time, the ending time, the changing time and the stop time of the universal figure changing display game as the specific period, and set the specific period according to the game value to be given.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and other gaming machines, such as other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use the game balls. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, but includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines that use game balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be appropriately combined and applied.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

100 game control device (control means, setting means)

Claims (1)

A game in which a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and then stopped is executed, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state in which a game value is given to a player can be generated In the machine
Control means for controlling the game,
Probability set value to which the probability value used for the lottery of the special result is assigned , setting means for enabling selection from a plurality of types of probability set value by the operation of the operating means ,
The control means is
It is possible to select the length of the stop display period in which the result of the game is stopped and displayed according to the probability setting value,
Person when the first probability set value corresponding to the first probability value as the probability setting value is selected, a second probability setting value is selected that corresponds to less than the first probability value second probability value A gaming machine having a higher probability of selecting a longer stop display period than a case where it is present.

Images